JP7563564B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a specific lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, in slot machines, when the start lever is operated with medals as gaming media bets, an internal lottery is conducted and the reels begin to spin. If the stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the reels stop in response to the results of the internal lottery, a bonus according to the result is awarded (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-295707 A

Here, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the gaming machines mentioned above, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

The present invention relates to
A plurality of rotating bodies having a plurality of patterns applied thereto in a circumferential direction;
A display unit that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated;
a lottery means for holding a lottery to determine whether or not to award a special benefit to a player based on an operation of the start operation means;
A stop operation means for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a drive control means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
a first result which allows a prize to be won when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, and a second result which allows a prize to be won when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, as a lottery result by the lottery means;
a mode notifying means capable of executing a mode notifying including the first operation mode and the second operation mode by a predetermined notifying means;
a specific state is set in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is executable,
A means for transitioning to the specific state based on a predetermined transition condition;
A means for terminating the specific state based on a predetermined termination condition;
a means for executing a transition determination that enables the transition condition to be established based on a lottery result by the lottery means;
Equipped with
The transition determination is set so that the number of cases where it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied is greater than the number of cases where it is determined that the transition condition is not satisfied,
a case where the lottery result by the lottery means corresponds to the establishment of the transition condition is set more frequently than a case where the lottery result by the lottery means does not correspond to the establishment of the transition condition,
The present invention is characterized in that it comprises a means for executing a predetermined process related to the status notification in the game following the game in which the transition condition is satisfied .

The present invention makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of games.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to an embodiment. 1 is an oblique view of the slot machine with the front door closed. 1 is an oblique view of the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the symbols visible through the display window and the pay lines. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits provided. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits provided. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a winning mode. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a winning mode. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a winning mode. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control device. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device; 13 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing by the main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a lottery process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal gaming state. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a carryover state. 13 is a flowchart showing a reel control process. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop switches and the winning patterns that are achieved. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for BB state. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the difference in the degree of advantage of each game state. 13 is a flowchart showing a lottery result handling process. 13 is a flowchart showing the lottery process for transition to a favorable zone. 13 is a flowchart showing AT lottery processing. A figure showing an example of a favorable zone transition lottery table and an AT mode transition lottery table. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for adding AT. A figure showing an example of an add-on lottery table. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining an overview of an indication monitor and a section display. An explanatory diagram showing an overview of the push order notification presentation performed on the auxiliary display unit. 13 is a flowchart showing a winning result response process. 13 is a flowchart showing an AT type determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing a first section display process. 13 is a flowchart showing a second section display process. A flowchart showing processing when transitioning to a favorable zone. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a ceiling game number table. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance setting process performed by a display control device serving as a sub-side control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a start-up performance setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for setting effects when all stops are performed. 13 is a flowchart showing an AT performance setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a BB effect setting process. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. A diagram to explain the relationship between the display effects by the auxiliary display unit and the ceiling game number. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. 13 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display effects by the auxiliary display unit and the game result. FIG. This is a timing chart to explain the relationship between the favorable zone and BB. In variant example 1, (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the benefit awarded, (b) is a diagram showing a portion of the lottery table for the BB state, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of an AT mode transition lottery table at the time of transition. A flowchart showing processing when transitioning to a favorable zone. 13 is a flowchart showing a first section display process in Modification 2. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an AT mode transition lottery table at the time of transition. 13 is a flowchart showing a first section display process in Modification 3. 13 is a flowchart showing a second section display process. A flowchart showing the processing when transitioning to a favorable zone in variant example 4. 1A is a diagram showing an example of an AT mode transition lottery table at transition time, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of an AT type table. 13 is a flowchart showing a lottery result response process in Modification Example 5. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a notification lottery table. A flowchart showing the remaining game number management process in variant example 6. 13 is a flowchart showing a remaining number management process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a notification lottery table. 23 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing in variant example 7. (a) is a diagram showing a portion of a lottery table for the normal game state, (b) is a diagram showing an example of an AT mode transition lottery table at the time of transition, and (c) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the AT mode and the BB state. 23 is a flowchart showing a second section display process in Modification 8. A figure showing an example of a lottery table for transition to a favorable zone in variant example 9. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an AT mode transition lottery table at the time of transition. 13 is a flowchart showing a second section display process in the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a part of the complete stop time effect setting process. 13A is a flowchart showing a BB effect setting process, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of a display effect by the auxiliary display unit. This is a timing chart to explain the relationship between the favorable zone and BB. 13 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing in Modification Example 1. 13 is a flowchart showing a second section display process. 13 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing in variant example 2. 13 is a flowchart showing a second section display process. In the third modified example, (a) is a diagram showing a part of a lottery table for a normal gaming state, and (b) is a flowchart showing a second interval display process. 13 is a flowchart showing a part of the complete stop time effect setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a BB effect setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing in variant example 4. 13 is a flowchart showing a second section display process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an AT mode transition lottery table at the time of transition. 13A is a flowchart showing a BB effect setting process, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of a display effect by the auxiliary display unit. 13A is a flowchart showing a part of the process for setting the effect when all the wheels are stopped, and FIGS. 13B and 13C are diagrams showing an example of a display effect by the auxiliary display unit. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing in variant example 5. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an AT mode transition lottery table at the time of transition. A flowchart showing the processing at the time of transition to a favorable zone in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a ceiling game number table. 13 is a flowchart showing a lottery result handling process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a notification lottery table. 13 is a flowchart showing a second section display process. A flowchart showing the processing when transitioning to a favorable zone in variant example 1. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a specific flag set lottery table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a notification lottery table in Modification Example 2. 13 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing in variant example 3. 13 is a flowchart showing a second section display process. A diagram to explain the frequency with which processing is performed at the time of transition to a favorable zone depending on the type of BB state.

First Embodiment
An embodiment of the present invention, which is applied to a reel type gaming machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Fig. 1 is a front view of a slot machine 10, Fig. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with a front door 12 closed, Fig. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with a front door 12 open, Fig. 4 is a rear view of the front door 12, and Fig. 5 is a front view of a cabinet 11.

As shown in Figures 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 that forms its outer shell. The housing 11 is generally formed in a box shape with an open front, and is attached to the so-called island equipment by nailing it when installing it in an amusement hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a, 13b on the left side when viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with bearings 14a, 14b at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a, 13b. When the support shafts 13a, 13b are inserted into the bearings 14a, 14b, the front door 12 is supported rotatably around an opening and closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a, 13b with respect to the housing 11, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by rotating the front door 12. The front door 12 is locked and cannot be opened by a locking device 20 provided on its back side. A key cylinder 21 integrated with the locking device 20 is provided at the upper right end side of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 that notifies the player of the game status is provided near the top center of the front door 12. The game panel 25 has three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R arranged side by side, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be seen through each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into two parts, an upper part and a lower part, by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting a variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 is provided with a left reel 32L, a center reel 32M, and a right reel 32R each formed in a cylindrical (annular) shape. Each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is supported so that it can rotate with its central axis being the axis of rotation of the reel. The axes of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds one-to-one to each display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is visible through the corresponding display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. Furthermore, when reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed through display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R as if they are moving from top to bottom.

Here, we will briefly explain the configuration of the reel unit 31.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be rotated individually, i.e., independently, by driving each stepping motor. The stepping motor is set to rotate once by giving a drive signal (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse) of, for example, 500 pulses, and the rotational position of the stepping motor, i.e., the rotational position of the reel, is controlled by this excitation pulse. In addition, reel index sensors are installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the reel unit 31 to detect that the reel has rotated once. When the reel index sensor detects that the reel has rotated once, it outputs a detection signal to the main control device 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has rotated once. Therefore, the main control device 101 can check and correct the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output before the detection signal is input.

On the outer periphery of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, multiple symbols are drawn in the long side direction (rotation direction) as identification information. More specifically, 20 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, to switch from one symbol to the next symbol at a specified position, it is necessary to output 25 excitation pulses (= 500 pulses ÷ 20 symbols). Furthermore, the main control device 101 can determine which symbols are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R and stop a specified symbol at a position visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input.

Next, we will explain the symbols depicted on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Figure 6 shows the arrangement of symbols on the left reel 32L, center reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 20 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Numbers from 0 to 19 are also assigned to each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, but these numbers are numbers used by the main control device 101 to identify the symbols that are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, and are not actually assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, these numbers will be used in the following explanation.

There are ten types of symbols: "bell" symbol (e.g., the first on the left reel 32L), "replay" symbol (e.g., the zeroth on the left reel 32L), "red 7" symbol (e.g., the fourteenth on the left reel 32L), "watermelon" symbol (e.g., the second on the left reel 32L), "cherry" symbol (e.g., the eighth on the left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (e.g., the ninth on the left reel 32L), "white 7" symbol (e.g., the third on the left reel 32L), "young man" symbol (e.g., the eighteenth on the left reel 32L), "red shell" symbol (e.g., the fourth on the left reel 32L), and "white shell" symbol (e.g., the nineteenth on the left reel 32L). As shown in FIG. 6, the number and arrangement order of the various symbols are completely different on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each display window 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that of the 20 symbols on the corresponding reel, only three symbols are visible in their entirety. Therefore, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible through the display window 26L, 26M, 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game results of each game are announced using a total of three combinations of symbols, one symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the symbols that can be seen. As described above, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible, and as combinations of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. 7, there are combinations of symbols that stop on the upper line L1 connecting the upper symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, combinations of symbols that stop on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and combinations of symbols that stop on the lower line L3 connecting the lower symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There are also combinations of symbols that stop on a line L4 that slopes downward to the right, connecting the top symbols on the left reel 32L, the middle symbols on the middle reel 32M, and the bottom symbols on the right reel 32R, and combinations of symbols that stop on a line L5 that slopes upward to the right, connecting the bottom symbols on the left reel 32L, the middle symbols on the middle reel 32M, and the top symbols on the right reel 32R. There are also combinations of symbols that stop on a curved line L6, connecting the middle symbols on the left reel 32L, the top symbols on the middle reel 32M, and the top symbols on the right reel 32R. The above lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the symbols are lined up, and the curved line L6 is a line that bends when the symbols are lined up. There are other combinations of symbols that stop on lines that bend, other than the curved line L6, but we will not explain them here.

Of these lines L1 to L6, some are activated by betting on medals, and some are not. When symbols stop in a specified combination on an activated line, i.e., an activated line, a win is achieved and a bonus is awarded in which a specified number of medals, which serve as gaming media, are paid out, or a bonus is awarded in which the game state is changed. On the other hand, when symbols stop in a specified combination on an inactivated line, a win is not achieved and the bonus is not awarded.

In this slot machine 10, among the above lines L1 to L6, the bent line L6 is set as the active line. More specifically, in this slot machine 10, three medals are bet to start the game, in which case only the bent line L6 is set as the active line, and the other lines L1 to L5 are not set as active lines. In the following description, the bent line L6 may be referred to as the active line ML. In addition, hereinafter, a game that starts with three medals bet is also referred to as a 3-bet game, a game that starts with two medals bet is also referred to as a 2-bet game, and a game that starts with one medal bet is also referred to as a 1-bet game. Note that in this embodiment, 1-bet games and 2-bet games are not set. That is, in this embodiment, only 3-bet games are set.

Figures 8 and 9 show the correspondence between winning combinations of symbols and the benefits that will be awarded if a winning combination is achieved.

The small prize winnings that result in medal payouts include the 1st small prize winning to the 27th small prize winning.

When the "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML, the first small win is achieved. When the first small win is achieved, seven medals are paid out.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), when the symbol corresponding to the first small win stops on the pay line ML, the "bell" symbols stop in a line on the upper line L1. This allows the player to easily understand that a small win corresponding to a bell has been achieved.

When the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, the "red shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "white 7" symbol, the "white shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the second small win is won. When the second small win is won, seven medals are paid out.

As shown in FIG. 11(b), when the symbol corresponding to the second minor win stops on the pay line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop in a line sloping to the right L4. This allows the player to easily understand that a minor win corresponding to the watermelon has been achieved.

When the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML, the third minor win is achieved. When the third minor win is achieved, seven medals are paid out.

As shown in FIG. 11(c), when the symbol corresponding to the third minor win stops on the pay line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops in a line on the upper line L1. This allows the player to easily understand that a minor win corresponding to the watermelon has been achieved.

The 4th to 27th minor prizes are so-called miss prizes, which are awarded when the 1st minor prize is missed. When the 4th to 27th minor prizes are awarded, one medal is paid out. The 4th to 27th minor winning symbols are achieved when the corresponding combination of the "replay", "red 7", "BAR", "red shell", "white shell", "young man" or "bell" symbols on the left reel 32L, the "white 7", "cherry", "red shell", "young man" or "red 7", "watermelon", "replay", "BAR", "bell" or "white shell" symbols on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7", "white 7", "white shell", "young man" or "watermelon", "red shell", "BAR" or "replay" symbols on the right reel 32R stops on the active line ML. As shown in FIG. 8, the symbol combinations corresponding to the 4th to 27th minor wins are set so that none of the "bell" symbols stop aligned on a straight line (L1 to L5), making it easy to understand that the minor win corresponding to the bell has not been achieved.

Incidentally, in a configuration in which medals are paid out based on the winning of the above-mentioned 1st to 27th minor winning combinations, the paid out medals are a type of bonus awarded according to the outcome of the game. In this specification, the paid out medals may also be referred to as "out balls," and the ratio of the number of paid out medals (out balls) to the number of medals inserted (bet) may also be referred to as "out ball rate."

The winning combinations that grant the replay privilege, which allows the player to play the next game without inserting a medal, are the 1st replay winning combination to the 11th replay winning combination. As shown in FIG. 9, winning symbol combinations are set for each of the 1st replay to the 11th replay.

A first replay win is achieved when the "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Watermelon" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "Red 7", "White 7", "White Shell" or "Youth" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML. As shown in FIG. 10(d), when the symbol corresponding to the first replay win stops on the pay line ML, the "Replay" symbols stop in line on the center line L2. This allows the player to easily understand that a replay win corresponding to a replay has been achieved.

The second replay wins when the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "BAR" or "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. When the symbols corresponding to the second replay win stop on the active line ML, as shown in FIG. 12(a), the "BAR" symbols stop in a line on the upward-right line L5, or as shown in FIG. 12(b), the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol stop on the upward-right line L5 in order from the left. When the second replay wins, the game state does not change, but the game state changes to a notification mode that is advantageous to the player, and the AT mode, in which the player can expect to win medals, is started. The AT mode will be explained in detail later.

The third and fourth replays are adjustment replays in case multiple replays result in overlapping wins.

In the fifth replay, a win is achieved when the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7", "white 7", "BAR", "cherry", "white shell" or "young man" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML. As shown in FIG. 10(e), when the symbols corresponding to the fifth replay win stop on the pay line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the top row of the left reel 32L and the top row of the middle reel 32M, but the "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the top row of the right reel 32R (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the bottom row of the right reel 32R), resulting in a stop pattern that is known as a miss of the upper row watermelon tenpai. Furthermore, when the symbol corresponding to the fifth replay win stops on the active line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the top of the left reel 32L and the bottom of the right reel 32R, but the "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the middle of the middle reel 32M (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the top of the middle reel 32M), resulting in a so-called right-downward watermelon tenpai miss.

In the sixth replay, a win is achieved when the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, the "red shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or the "red shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML. As shown in FIG. 10(f), when the symbols corresponding to the sixth replay win stop on the pay line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the top row of the left reel 32L and the top row of the right reel 32R, but the "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the top row of the middle reel 32M (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the middle row of the middle reel 32M), resulting in a stop pattern that is so-called "upper row watermelon tenpai miss." In addition, when the symbol corresponding to the sixth replay win stops on the active line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the top of the left reel 32L and the middle of the middle reel 32M, but the "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the bottom of the right reel 32R (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the top of the right reel 32R), resulting in a so-called right-downward watermelon tenpai miss.

The seventh replay wins when the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7", "cherry" symbol, "red shell" or "young man" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML. As shown in FIG. 11(a), when the symbol corresponding to the seventh replay win stops on the pay line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop in a line on the middle line L2.

The 8th replay wins when the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" or "red shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML. As shown in FIG. 11(b), when the symbol corresponding to the 8th replay win stops on the pay line ML, the "replay" symbol stops on the middle row of the left reel 32L and the middle row of the middle reel 32M, but the "replay" symbol does not stop on the middle row of the right reel 32R (the "bell" symbol stops on the middle row of the right reel 32R), resulting in a stop pattern that is known as a middle row replay miss.

In the ninth replay, a win is achieved when the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "red shell" symbol, or "young man" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "white shell" symbol, or "young man" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. In the eleventh replay, a win is achieved when the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, or "red shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. As shown in FIG. 11(c) and FIG. 11(d), when a symbol corresponding to the 9th replay win or the 11th replay win stops on the pay line ML, a "cherry" symbol stops on the lower row of the left reel 32L. If the 9th replay or the 11th replay is won, when a stopping operation is performed aiming for the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R, the "cherry" symbol stops on the upper row in the case of the 9th replay win, and the "cherry" symbol stops on the middle or lower row in the case of the 11th replay win, so it is possible to distinguish between the 9th replay win and the 11th replay win. The 10th replay wins when the 9th replay or the 11th replay cannot be won, i.e., when there is a possibility of a miss.

More specifically, the 10th replay win occurs when the 9th replay win is won but the 9th replay win cannot be made, and occurs when the 11th replay win is won but the 11th replay win cannot be made. In other words, when the 10th replay win is made, it is difficult to tell whether the 9th replay or the 11th replay has been won. In other words, in order to determine whether the 9th replay or the 11th replay has been won, it is necessary to operate the left reel 32L to aim for a "cherry".

State transition winnings, which only result in a transition of the game state, include the 1st BB winning and the 2nd BB winning.

When the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML, a 1st BB win is achieved. When a 1st BB win is achieved, the game state transitions to the 1st BB state. As shown in FIG. 11(e), when the symbol corresponding to the 1st BB win stops on the pay line ML, the "white 7" symbols stop in a line on the center line L2.

When the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML, a second BB win is achieved. When a second BB win is achieved, the game state transitions to the second BB state. As shown in FIG. 11(f), when the symbols corresponding to a second BB win stop on the pay line ML, the "white 7" symbol stops in the middle row of the left reel 32L and the middle row of the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol stops in the middle row of the right reel 32R.

A start lever 41 is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25, which is operated to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or a start operation means that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, i.e., to start the variable display of the patterns. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts to rotate.

Button-shaped stop switches 42-44 are provided to the right of the start lever 41 and are operated to individually stop each of the spinning reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Each stop switch 42-44 is located directly below the display window 26L, 26M, and 26R that corresponds to the reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped.

Stop detection sensors 42a to 44a (FIG. 15) are connected to the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are connected to the main control device 101, which will be described later. The main control device 101 then determines that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a output a detection signal of a LOW signal, and when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the detection signal switches from a LOW signal to a HIGH signal. The main control device 101 determines that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated by determining this signal switch. When the main control device 101 determines that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, it controls the reel corresponding to the operated switch to stop spinning.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the left reel 32L stops spinning, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the middle reel 32M stops spinning, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the right reel 32R stops spinning. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute a stop operation means that is operated to stop the variable display of the symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

A medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided below and to the right of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal insertion slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting game media. In addition, considering that the medal insertion slot 45 involves the action of the player directly inserting medals, it can also be said to constitute a direct input means for directly inputting game media.

The medals inserted through the medal insertion port 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by a selector 46, which serves as a passage switching means provided on the back of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is not energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to a hopper device 51 stored inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to a medal tray 50 from a medal discharge port 49 provided on the lower front surface of the front door 12, and are returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 that stores medals, and a payout device 53 that pays out medals to players. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge medals to an opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48, and pays out the medals to a medal tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. In addition, a reserve tank 54 is provided to the right of the hopper device 51 to prevent medals from being stored in the storage tank 52 by more than a predetermined amount. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a is provided to discharge medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54. Therefore, if medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals will be stored in the reserve tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal insertion port 45. If the return switch 55 is operated when a medal inserted into the medal insertion port 45 is stuck in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically linked and operated, and the medal stuck in the selector 46 is returned from the medal ejection port 49.

A first credit insertion switch 56 is provided on the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R for inserting a predetermined specific number of credited virtual medals as game media at one time out of the specified number of the game. The specific number is set according to the progress of the game. For example, when the specified number of the game is set to 3 and the specific number is set to 3, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, 3 virtual medals are inserted on the condition that there are credits, when the specified number is set to 2 and the specific number is set to 2, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, 2 virtual medals are inserted on the condition that there are credits, when the specified number is set to 3 or 2 and the specific number is set to 3, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, 3 virtual medals are inserted on the condition that there are credits, when the specified number is set to 3 or 2 and the specific number is set to 2, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, 2 virtual medals are inserted on the condition that there are credits. In addition, a second credit insertion switch 57 is provided to the left of the first credit insertion switch 56. The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting one virtual medal. The credit insertion switches 56, 57, together with the medal insertion slot 45, constitute an input means for inputting game media. Also, while the medal insertion slot 45 involves the action of the player directly inserting a medal, the credit insertion switches 56, 57 only involve the action of inserting a virtual medal based on stored memory. Considering this, they can also be said to constitute indirect input means for indirectly inputting game media. Note that in this slot machine 10, no credit insertion switch is provided because two virtual medals are inserted.

The first credit insertion switch 56 is set to have a larger operating surface for operation by the player than the second credit insertion switch 57, and the first credit insertion switch 56 is easier to operate than the second credit insertion switch 57. Therefore, it is expected that normally the player will operate the first credit insertion switch 56 to proceed with the game. In other words, normally the player will insert a specific number of coins out of the specified number to play the game.

To the right of the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57 is a performance switch 66 that is operated when a performance occurs.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41. In other words, this slot machine 10 has a credit function that stores and stores as virtual medals any surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) or medals paid out when a prize is won, and when the settlement switch 59 is operated while virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out from the medal discharge port 49 as real medals. In this case, when focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, the settlement switch 59 can also be said to constitute a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored and stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display section 60 that displays the number of credited virtual medals, a remaining payout number display section 61 that displays the number of medals remaining to be paid out until the BB state ends, and a payout number display section 62 that displays the number of medals paid out when a win occurs. These display sections 60 to 62 are made up of 7-segment displays, but can of course be replaced with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on the game panel 25 and to the right of the payout number display unit 62, there is provided an instruction monitor 68 having a push order indicator that notifies the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and an area indicator that indicates an advantageous area in which the player can play in an advantageous situation by changing the winning rate of minor roles by notifying the operation order. The instruction monitor 68 will be described in detail later.

At the top of the front door 12, there are provided an upper lamp 63 that lights up or flashes as the game progresses, a pair of left and right speakers 64 that play various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game status, and an auxiliary display unit 65 that gives the player various information. The auxiliary display unit 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and since the game using each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be considered to be performed by the main display unit, it is referred to as the auxiliary display unit 65 in this embodiment. At the back of the auxiliary display unit 65, there is provided a display control device 81 for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65.

On the front door 12, below the game panel 25 and below the stop switches 42 to 44, a lower display section 69 is provided on which the model name of the gaming machine is written or which may constitute a specified display screen. The lower display section 69 may be configured as a liquid crystal display section, an operating means for presentation may be provided on the lower display section 69, or the entire lower display section 69 may be an operating means capable of operating.

Inside the housing 11, a power supply box 70 is provided to the left of the hopper device 51. The power supply box 70 houses the power supply device 91 inside and is equipped with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each part including the main control device 101. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting an error state of the slot machine 10. The setting key insertion hole 73 is for the hall manager or the like to adjust the medal output. In other words, the hall manager or the like can set the winning probability (setting value) of the slot machine 10 by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it ON. The reset switch 72 is operated not only to reset an error state, but also to clear various stored information of the slot machine 10 and to change the winning probability.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that controls the game is attached to the cabinet 11.

The main control device 101 is provided with a hand ratio monitor 77 for indicating the ratio between advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player. The hand ratio monitor 77 is installed on the side of the main control device 101 facing the front of the gaming machine so that it is visible from the front of the gaming machine when the front door 12 is in an open state, and is not visible from the front of the gaming machine when the front door 12 is in a closed state. More specifically, it is housed in a board box in which the main control device 101 is housed so that the display surface of the hand ratio monitor 77 is visible through the board box. Incidentally, when the front door 12 is in a closed state, the hand ratio monitor 77 is not visible through the gaps of the display windows 26L to 26R, and the hand ratio monitor 77 cannot be checked unless the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21 and the front door 12 is in an open state. The hand ratio monitor 77 will be described in detail later.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagrams in Figures 13 and 14.

The main control device 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around the CPU 102, which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as the main board built into the slot machine 10.

On the input side of the main control device 101, various sensors are connected, such as the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that detects when each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation), a start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a that detect the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45, a payout detection sensor 51a that detects medals paid out from the hopper device 51, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, a settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the settlement switch 59, a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and a setting key detection sensor 73a that detects when a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned ON. Signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input/output port 104.

The power supply unit 91 is connected to the input side of the main control unit 101 via the input/output port 104. The power supply unit 91 is equipped with a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to the main control unit 101 and each electronic device of the slot machine 10, a power outage monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power supply cut-off state and generates a power failure signal not only during a power failure but also when the power supply is cut off by the power switch 71. For this reason, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of 12 volts DC in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and is configured to determine that the power supply has been cut off and output a power failure signal when this drive voltage drops to less than 10 volts, for example. The power failure signal is supplied to both the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal and executes the power failure processing described below. The power failure signal is also configured to be supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts to be used as a drive voltage in control systems such as the main control unit 101, even if the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time for which this stabilized voltage is output is sufficient to allow the main control unit 101 to execute power outage processing.

The output side of the main control device 101 is connected via an input/output port 104 to the reel unit 31 (more specifically, the stepping motor for rotating each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided on the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit display unit 60, the remaining number of coins to be paid out display unit 61, the number of coins to be paid out display unit 62, the instruction monitor 68, the role ratio monitor 77, the display control device 81, and an external centralized terminal board 121 that can transmit information to a hall management device (not shown), etc.

The above-mentioned CPU 102 includes a ROM 105 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 102, a RAM 106 that secures a working area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105, and various counters, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, and other processing circuits required for the slot machine 10, as well known in the art (not shown). The ROM 105 and RAM 106 form a main memory as a storage means, and the programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-mentioned ROM 105 as part of the control programs.

RAM 106 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from power supply device 91 even after power to slot machine 10 is cut off. RAM 106 is provided with a backup area in addition to memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery results of winning combinations, a stop information storage area 106b for storing stop information used when controlling the stop of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a setting value information storage area 106c for storing setting values.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer at the time of power interruption (including power interruption by operating the power switch 71; the same applies below) in the event that power is interrupted due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage is resolved (including power on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies below), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before power was interrupted based on the information in the backup area. Writing to the backup area is performed by the power outage processing (see Figure 15) when power is interrupted, and the restoration of each value written to the backup area is performed during main processing when power is turned on.

The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. When the power is cut off, an NMI interrupt process is immediately executed as a power outage flag generation process.

As shown in FIG. 14, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181, which is a calculation processing means. The CPU 181 includes a ROM 182 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 181, and a RAM 183 for securing a working area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182.

The display control device 81 is provided with input/output ports (not shown), with the main control device 101 connected to the input side and the upper lamps 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65 connected to the output side. The display control device 81 drives and controls the upper lamps 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65 based on various commands input from the main control device 101. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that performs auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101, which is the main board that manages the overall game. In other words, by providing a sub-board for sounds, lamps, and displays that are indirectly related to the game, the burden on the main board is reduced.

The input side of the display control device 81 is connected to the effect switch 66 (more specifically, an effect switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the effect switch 66) and the like. Note that the display control device 81 may also be configured to drive and control the various display units 60 to 62, 68.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described. The processes of the CPU 102 can be broadly divided into main processing which is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing which is started periodically (every 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt processing which is started when a power outage signal is input to the NMI terminal. Below, we will explain the processes related to the progress of the game, i.e., timer interrupt processing, and main processing.

Figure 15 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process that is periodically executed by the main control unit 101, and a timer interrupt is generated by the CPU 102 of the main control unit 101, for example, every 1.49 msec.

First, in the register save process shown in step S101, the values of all registers in the CPU 102 that are used in normal processing, which will be described later, are saved to a backup area in the RAM 106. In step S102, it is confirmed whether the power outage flag is set, and if the power outage flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103, where power outage processing is executed.

Here is an overview of how power outages are handled.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power outage signal is input to the main control device 101 via the NMI terminal. When the power outage signal is input, the main control device 101 immediately executes an NMI interrupt process and sets a power outage flag in a power outage flag storage area provided in the RAM 106.

In the power failure process, first, it is determined whether the transmission of the command has been completed, and if the transmission has not been completed, this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process, and the transmission of the command is terminated. If the transmission of the command has been completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, a RAM judgment value for judging whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal or not when the power failure is resolved is calculated and saved in the backup area, thereby prohibiting subsequent access to the RAM. After the above process is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the power being completely cut off and processing being unable to be executed. Note that, in consideration of the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to noise, for example, the power failure signal is checked to see if it is being output before entering the infinite loop. If the power failure signal is not being output, it means that the power failure state has been recovered, so writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power failure flag is reset, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. If the power failure signal continues to be output, the infinite loop is entered as it is. Incidentally, even in an infinite loop, it checks whether the power outage signal is being output, and if the power outage signal is no longer being output, it transitions to the main process.

Returning to the explanation of the timer interrupt process, if the power outage flag is not set in step S102, various processes from step S104 onwards are carried out.

That is, in step S104, a watchdog timer clear process is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed to enable the CPU 102 itself to set the next timer interrupt. In step S106, a stepping motor control process is performed to drive the stepping motors that are the reel drive motors for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to rotate. In step S107, a sensor monitoring process is performed to read the status of various sensors such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input/output port 104 (see FIG. 15), and to monitor whether the read results are normal or not. In step S108, a timer calculation process is performed to subtract the values of each counter and timer. In step S109, a counter process is performed to output the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a command output process is performed to send various commands, such as a lottery result command, to the display control device 81. In step S111, a segment data setting process is performed to set the segment data to be displayed on the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, the payout number display unit 62, and the instruction monitor 68. In step S112, a segment data display process is performed to supply the segment data set in the segment data setting process to each display unit 60 to 62, 68 and display the corresponding numbers, symbols, etc. In step S113, a port output process is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104. In step S114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in the previous step S101 are restored to the corresponding register in the CPU 102. Thereafter, in step S115, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

Next, the normal processing that performs the main control related to the game will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 16.

First, in step S201, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt. In step S202, a pre-start process is performed to enable play. In the pre-start process, the system waits until the display control device 81 and other devices have finished initializing. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and other devices has finished, the system performs the game management process shown in steps S203 to S212.

As part of the game management process, in step S203, various game information and other data (e.g., random number values used in the previous game) stored in the RAM 106 are cleared. Then, in step S204, a start waiting process is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether any replay winning was achieved in the previous game. If any replay winning was achieved, an automatic insertion process is performed to automatically insert virtual medals in the same number as the previous bet number, and the start waiting process is terminated. Specifically, for example, if a replay winning is achieved in a 3-bet game, a process to automatically insert 3 virtual medals is performed, and if a replay winning is achieved in a 2-bet game, a process to automatically insert 2 virtual medals is performed.

In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display unit 60. In other words, if any replay winning was achieved in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals he owns and without inserting medals. If no replay winning was achieved, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed to check whether there is an abnormality in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process step S107 of the timer interrupt process. If an abnormality is detected, an abnormality occurrence process is performed to put the slot machine 10 into an error state and notify the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the sensor reading result is normal, it is determined whether the settlement switch 59 has been operated, and if the settlement switch 59 has been operated, a medal return process is performed to pay out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals.

After the medal return process is completed or if the settlement switch 59 has not been operated, it is determined whether medals have been inserted or the credit insertion switch 56, 57 has been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, and if either has been performed, a medal insertion process is performed to change the number of bets, etc., and the start waiting process ends. Also, if neither medals have been inserted nor the credit insertion switch 56, 57 has been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process ends as is.

After the start waiting process is completed, in step S205, it is determined whether the number of medals bet has reached the specified number. In this slot machine 10, the specified number in the bonus state (BB state) is set to "3", and the specified number in the game state other than the bonus state is set to "3". In other words, in the bonus state, a positive determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of medals bet is "3", and a positive determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of medals bet is "3" even in a state other than the bonus state. In other words, if no medals have been bet, or if the number of medals bet is "1" or "2", a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of medals bet has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the process from the sensor abnormality confirmation process onwards is performed.

If the number of bets has reached the specified number, a bet command including information on the number of bets that was determined to be positive in step S205 is set as an output target to the display control device 81, which acts as a sub-control device, in step S206. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 in step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The display control device 81 that receives the bet command executes processing for notifications based on betting operations (for example, notifications that a game start condition has been met, or notifications of lottery results from a previous game), and controls the speaker 64 and auxiliary display unit 65.

After executing the process of step S206, it is determined in step S207 whether the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the process from the sensor abnormality confirmation process onwards is performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, it means that a start command has been issued to start the game, since the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that the specified number of medals have been bet. In such a case, in step S208, a valid line setting process is performed to set the combination line corresponding to the number of bets as the valid line. In other words, only the bent line L6 is set as the valid line. In step S209, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-excited state to prohibit the acceptance of bets. After that, the lottery process in step S210, the reel control process in step S211, and the medal payout process in step S212 are executed in order, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, the lottery process in step S210 will be explained based on the flowchart in FIG. 17.

In step S301, a random number is obtained to be used when determining whether a winning combination has been achieved. In this slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuitry latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates random numbers between 0 and 65535, and after the CPU 102 confirms the operation of the start lever 41, it stores the value latched by the hardware circuitry in the RAM 106. With this configuration, it is possible to quickly obtain a random number when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuitry of this slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table is obtained to determine whether the winning combination has been achieved. In this slot machine 10, the game states are broadly divided into a normal game state and a bonus state, and a lottery table is set for each game state.

That is, in step S302, a lottery table corresponding to the game state is selected. For example, when the current game state is the normal game state, a lottery table for the normal game state is selected. In addition, in this slot machine 10, six stages of winning probability are prepared in advance, from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", and by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole and turning it ON and performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to set which winning probability is used to execute the internal processing. In step S302, when the setting value is "Setting 1", a lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting value is "Setting 6", a lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

Here we provide additional information about the process for setting the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process that is started by the main control device 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is started after the initialization process of the RAM 106 when the power is turned on in a state where the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned ON. In the winning probability setting process, the setting value is updated by one each time the start lever 41 is operated as a predetermined operation, and for example, the setting value is updated so that "setting 1" → "setting 2" → "setting 3" → "setting 4" → "setting 5" → "setting 6" → "setting 1" each time the start lever 41 is operated once. Note that each setting value is displayed, for example, on the credit display unit 60, and the display is updated each time the setting value is updated. Then, the operation of the start lever 41 with the setting key detection sensor 73a turned OFF is regarded as a setting value confirmation operation, and the setting value at that time is regarded as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process is terminated. Based on the end of the winning probability setting process, the display of the credit display unit 60 is also terminated. The setting value set in the winning probability setting process is stored in the setting value information storage area 106c of the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, a lottery table selection process is performed based on the stored setting value.

If the current game has not won a bonus such as 1st BB or 2nd BB and is in normal game mode in step S302, a lottery table for normal game mode is acquired in step S302. FIG. 18 shows a lottery table for normal game mode acquired in normal game mode. In the lottery table, index values IV are set, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After obtaining the lottery table, in step S303, the index value IV is set to 1, and in the following step S304, a judgment value DV to be used when determining whether the hand is a win or a loss is set. In this judgment value setting process, the current judgment value DV is added to the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to set a new judgment value DV. Note that in the initial judgment value setting process, the random number value obtained in step S301 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the current index value IV (1) and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random number value to set the new judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, a win/loss judgment is made for the combination corresponding to the index value IV. In the combination win/loss judgment, it is judged whether the judgment value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535, in step S306, a process is executed to set the win flag of the game result corresponding to the index value IV judged positive in step S305 in the win flag storage area 106a. For example, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=23, the second small win flag and the third small win flag are set in step S306. Also, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=24, the first BB win flag and the first replay win flag are set in step S306, and if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=25, the second BB win flag and the first replay win flag are set in step S306.

Incidentally, if the winning flag that has been set is not a winning flag indicating that the first BB has been won (first BB winning flag) or a winning flag indicating that the second BB has been won (second BB winning flag), the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a is reset after the game in which the corresponding selection flag is set ends (see S203 in normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is a first BB winning flag or a second BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset on the condition that the corresponding winning has been achieved. In other words, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over multiple games.

When the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery process for the game is performed by referring to the lottery table for the carryover state. In the lottery table for the carryover state (Figure 19), each index value IV and point value PV are set so that the first BB and second BB are not won.

In addition, instead of preparing a separate lottery table for the carryover state, in step S306 when the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, if a role other than the roles corresponding to the 1st BB and the 2nd BB (rep overlap 1st BB, rep overlap 2nd BB) is won, the corresponding winning flag may be set, and if a role other than the roles corresponding to the 1st BB and the 2nd BB is not won, the corresponding winning flag may not be set.

In other words, for example, in a state where the first BB winning flag is carried over, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 24, the first BB winning flag and the first replay winning flag are not set, and in a state where the first BB winning flag is carried over, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 11, for example, the first small win flag, the fourth small win flag, the fifth small win flag, and the eighth small win flag may be set.

If the judgment value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, this means that the hand corresponding to the index value IV has not been won. In this case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S307, and in the following step S308, it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, i.e., whether or not there is a target for which a win/loss judgment should be made. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV incremented by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a target for which a win/loss judgment should be made, the process returns to step S304, and the judgment of the hand continues. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used to judge the win/loss of the previous hand (i.e., the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, and in step S305, the hand is judged to be a win/loss based on the judgment value DV.

Incidentally, when the winning combination is judged using the lottery table shown in FIG. 18, that is, when playing in the normal game mode, the probability of winning normal lip A (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1 in 27.3. The probability of winning normal lip B (probability of winning when IV = 2) and the probability of winning normal lip C (probability of winning when IV = 3) are about 1 in 26.2. The probability of winning chance eye A (probability of winning when IV = 4) is about 1 in 164, the probability of winning chance eye B (probability of winning when IV = 5) is about 1 in 262, and the probability of winning chance eye C (probability of winning when IV = 6) is about 1 in 16,400, and it is set so that chance eye B is easier to win than chance eye C, and chance eye A is easier to win than chance eye B. The probability of winning Cherry A (probability of winning when IV=7) is approximately 1 in 107. The probability of winning Cherry B (probability of winning when IV=8) is approximately 1 in 215, and the probability of winning Cherry C (probability of winning when IV=9) is approximately 1 in 13,100, so that Cherry B is easier to win than Cherry C, and Cherry A is easier to win than Cherry B. The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV=10) is approximately 1 in 6,550. The probability of winning the forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle forward push bell 1, middle forward push bell 2, middle reverse push bell 1, middle reverse push bell 2, reverse pinch bell 1, reverse pinch bell 2, reverse push bell 1, reverse push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as push order bells) (probability of winning when IV = 11 to 22) is about 1 in 18.2. The probability of winning the watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 23) is about 1 in 219. The probability of winning the first BB of the overlapping lip (probability of winning when IV = 24) is about 1 in 20.1. The probability of winning the second BB of the overlapping lip (probability of winning when IV = 25) is about 1 in 6.7. The probability of winning either the first or second overlapping BB (probability of winning when IV = 24, 25) is approximately 1 in 5 combined, which is set higher than the probability of winning other roles (replay or small role, IV = 1-23).

In the lottery table for the carryover state (FIG. 19) obtained when the first BB or second BB has been won, the winning probability of the lip overlap first BB and lip overlap second BB corresponding to the first BB or second BB is different from that in the lottery table for the normal game state, and the other lottery probabilities are the same in the normal game state and the carryover state. In other words, in the lottery table for the carryover state, the probability of winning the lip overlap first BB and lip overlap second BB (the probability of winning when IV=24, 25) is zero. In the lottery table for the carryover state, the probability of not winning any role (the probability of losing) is about 1 in 5.02 because the lip overlap first BB or lip overlap second BB is not won. The lottery table for the normal game state and the lottery table for the carryover state are obtained according to the state in the process of step S302 above.

By the way, in normal gameplay, excluding the increase or decrease in the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state, you can expect a decrease of about 0.91 medals per game (net increase of medals minus about 0.91 medals), and in carryover state, excluding the increase or decrease in the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state, you can expect a decrease of about 1.51 medals per game (net increase of medals minus about 1.51 medals).

After the winning flag is set in step S306, or if it is determined in step S308 that there are no targets to be judged, this means that the judgment of the winning or losing role has been completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S309, where a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a specified period of time.

In the next step S310, a lottery result response process is performed. In the lottery result response process, a process is performed to determine whether or not to change the game state depending on the results of the lottery in steps S301 to S308, and a process is performed to notify the player of the push order role. The lottery result response process will be described in detail later.

After executing the processing of step S310, a lottery result command is set in step S311. Here, the lottery result command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the result of the winning/losing role determination. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are simply set in the ring buffer, and no command is sent to the display control device 81. The command is sent to the display control device 81 in the command output processing (step S110) of the timer interrupt processing described above.

Then, in step S312, a stop information setting process is executed to set symbols that can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery result of the current game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information corresponding to a winning combination is set based on the winning flag set in step S306. For example, when the push order bell 1 is won (won when IV = 11) and the first small role winning flag, the fourth small role winning flag, the fifth small role winning flag, and the eighth small role winning flag are set, the stop symbol information is set so that symbols corresponding to the first small role, the fourth small role, the fifth small role, and the eighth small role winning can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Also, when the watermelon is won (won when IV = 23) and the second small role winning flag and the third small role winning flag are set, the stop symbol information is set so that symbols corresponding to the second small role and the third small role winning can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the following step S313, if multiple stoppable symbol information has been set in step S312, a priority setting process is executed to set the priority order. In the priority setting process, if multiple roles among the small role, replay, and bonus roles have been won, the following priority order is set. If a small role and a bonus have been won, the priority order is set so that the small role win takes priority, and if a small role win cannot be won, a bonus win takes priority. If a replay and a bonus have been won, the priority order is set so that the replay win takes priority.

For example, in a situation where the first BB has been won (the first BB winning flag is set, and the game in which the first BB was won or the first BB winning has been carried over), if the player wins watermelon and the stop symbol information corresponding to the first BB winning and the second and third small wins has been set, the priority is set so that the second and third small wins take precedence over the first BB winning. Also, in a situation where the second BB has been won (the second BB winning flag is set, and the game in which the second BB was won or the second BB winning has been carried over), if the player wins normal lip A and the stop symbol information corresponding to the second BB winning and the first and second replay winnings has been set, the priority is set so that each replay winning takes precedence over the second BB winning.

Here, if the replay is won, the winning combination of symbols is set so that one of the winning replays will always win. In other words, if the replay is won, the replay win will always be established, and there will be no missed wins. Therefore, if the stop symbol information for the replay and the bonus is set, one of the set replays will always win, and the bonus will never win. In this embodiment, the first BB or second BB is won by winning the first BB or second BB, and if the first BB or second BB is won, not only the first BB or second BB but also the first replay will be won. Therefore, in a game where the first BB or second BB is won, the first replay win will be established, not the first BB or second BB.

After executing the process of step S313, the first section display process is executed in step S314, and then the lottery process is terminated. The first section display process is a process related to the display control of the indication monitor 68 and the role ratio monitor 77, and this process will be described in detail later.

Next, the reel control process in step S211 will be explained based on the flowchart in FIG. 20.

In the reel control process, first, in step S401, a spin effect process is performed. The spin effect process is a process for performing an effect using reel control during an invalid period, based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S309. In the following step S402, a spin start process is performed to start the spinning of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the spin start process, it is checked whether a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reels started spinning in the previous game, and if not, it waits until the wait time has elapsed. If the wait time has elapsed, the wait time for the next game is reset, and a motor control initialization process is performed to set spin start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106. By performing this process, the stepping motor acceleration process is started in the stepping motor control process (step S106) of the timer interrupt process, and each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts spinning. For this reason, even if the player bets a specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not start spinning immediately. After that, it waits until each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R spins at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and the spin start process is terminated. In addition, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R reaches a constant speed, the CPU 102 lights up the lamps (not shown) of each stop switch 42-44 to notify the player that it is possible to issue a stop command.

Following the spin start process, in step S403, it is determined whether any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, the process waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, where it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel has been operated, i.e., whether or not a stop command has been generated. If a stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S403, where it waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. If a stop command has been generated, a stop command command is set in step S405. Here, the stop command command is a command that is sent to the display control device 81 to allow the display control device 81 to know which stop switch has been operated to generate the stop command. If a stop command command has been set, the stop control process shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the spinning reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position (lower in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is confirmed by the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the following step S407, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, five stop modes are prepared as stop modes for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated: a stop mode in which the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is, a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for one symbol, a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for two symbols, a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for three symbols, and a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for four symbols. Therefore, in step S407, a value between 0 and 4 is calculated as the slip number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S408, the calculated slip number is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol that will actually stop at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol of the reel to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal, and if they are equal, a reel stop process is performed in step S410 to stop the rotation of the reel. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. If all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have not stopped, a second stop information setting process is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

The second stop information setting process is a process for changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels have stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning flag that has been set and the stop outcome of the stopped reels. In this slot machine 10, for example, when a win occurs when IV=11 to 22, that is, when the push order bell is won (see Figures 18 and 19), the second stop information setting process is performed to change the winning mode that is established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command.

Figure 21 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode that is established. For example, when the middle push bell 1 is won, the stop information is set so that the 12th small prize, the 13th small prize, or the 16th small prize is established when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → middle → left, and the stop information is set so that the 1st small prize can be established in addition to the 12th small prize, the 13th small prize, and the 16th small prize when they are operated in the order of middle → left → right. However, even if the stop information is set in this way, the corresponding winning may not be established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The arrangement of symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will be briefly described. In this slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped after sliding a maximum of four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. Therefore, when symbols of the same kind are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R with an interval of four symbols or less, when a winning symbol is formed, the winning symbol can be stopped on an active line regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop switch 43. On the other hand, for symbols arranged so that a section is formed with five symbols or more apart, the player needs to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 while aiming at the symbol in order to stop it on an active line.

As an example, we will explain the case where the middle push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of left → middle → right. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop in order to achieve the 12th small prize, the 13th small prize, or the 16th small prize, as described above.

The 12th minor winning symbol on the left reel 32L is the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol. The 13th minor winning symbol on the left reel 32L is the "red shell" symbol and the "white shell" symbol. The 16th minor winning symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol and the "young man" symbol. On the left reel 32L, the 12th minor winning symbol, the 13th minor winning symbol and the 16th minor winning symbol are arranged so that the distance between the symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, regardless of the operation timing, any one of the 12th minor winning symbol, the 13th minor winning symbol and the 16th minor winning symbol will stop on the active line (middle row). In this slot machine 10, when multiple target symbols are operated at a timing when they can be stopped, the stop control is performed so that the symbol with the fewer slip frames is stopped on the active line. That is, for example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the first "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the bottom row, it is possible for the fourth "red shell" symbol (2-frame slip) which is the 13th minor win symbol and the fifth "replay" symbol (3-frame slip) which is the 16th minor win symbol to stop in the middle row, but the left reel 32L is controlled to stop the fourth "red shell" symbol, which has the fewest number of slip frames, in the middle row. In this case, although there is still room for the 13th minor win to be established, the 12th and 16th minor wins will not be established.

When the 13th minor winning symbol on the left reel 32L stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the 13th minor winning symbol can be achieved.

The 13th minor symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol. On the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbols are arranged so that the distance between each "replay" symbol is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, in this case, regardless of the timing of the operation of the middle stop switch 43, stopping control is performed so that the "replay" symbol stops on the top row of the middle reel 32M.

The 13th minor winning symbol on the right reel 32R is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol. These symbols are arranged on the right reel 32R so that the distance between the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol is 5 symbols or more. In other words, depending on the timing of the operation of the right stop switch 44, there are cases where the "white shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol, which is the 13th minor winning symbol, can be stopped on the top row, and cases where it cannot be stopped on the top row. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when it is possible to stop it on the top row, the 13th minor winning symbol is established, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when it is not possible to stop it on the top row, it will be a so-called miss.

Here, when the "red shell" symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 32L and the "replay" symbol stops in the top of the middle reel 32M, it can mean that middle push bell 1 is won and the 13th small win is achieved, as described above, or that middle push bell 2 is won and the 15th small win is achieved. In other words, the 15th small win symbol in middle push bell 2 is the same as the 13th small win symbol on the left reel 32L and middle reel 32M. And on the right reel 32R, while the 13th small win symbol is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol, the 15th small win symbol is the "red 7" symbol and the "white 7" symbol, which are different. In particular, the 13th and 15th minor winning symbols on the right reel 32R are arranged so that if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when the 13th minor winning symbol can be stopped on a valid line, the 15th minor winning symbol cannot be stopped on a valid line, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when the 15th minor winning symbol can be stopped on a valid line, the 13th minor winning symbol cannot be stopped on a valid line. Therefore, assuming that it is not known whether the middle push bell 1 or the middle push bell 2 has been won, even if the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are stopped in a stopping state that may result in the 13th and 15th minor winnings, it is not possible to aim for them and win.

Next, we will explain an example in which the middle push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of middle → left → right. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop in order to achieve the 1st small win, the 12th small win, the 13th small win, or the 16th small win.

Here, in this embodiment, in the priority setting process (step S313) of the lottery process (FIG. 17), when multiple small winning flags are set, the priority is set based on either the number of symbols priority control or the number of coins priority control. That is, as described above, for example, when a bonus and a small winning (the first to 27th small winnings that may generate medal payouts) are overlapping and winning, the small winning is set to be prioritized, and when a bonus and a replay are overlapping and winning, the replay is set to be prioritized. On the other hand, when multiple small winnings are overlapping and winning, the priority is set by either the number of symbols priority control, which groups small winnings with a common number of medals paid out as a prize when winning, and sets the winning of the small winning of the group with the larger number of symbols associated as the winning pattern of each group to be prioritized, or the number of coins priority control, which sets the winning of the small winning of the group with the larger number of medals paid out as a prize when winning.

For example, we will explain the case of the first, twelfth, thirteenth, and sixteenth small prizes, which correspond to the operation sequence of center → left → right in the middle push bell 1. When the first small prize is won, 15 medals are paid out, whereas when the twelfth, thirteenth, or sixteenth small prize is won, one medal is paid out. In this case, the small prizes that have the same number of medals paid out as a prize when they are won are grouped into the first group (first small prize) which will pay out 15 medals, and the second group (twelfth, thirteenth, and sixteenth small prizes) which will pay out one medal. In the number of symbols priority control, for example, the first group of winning symbols on the middle reel 32M (the first small win symbol on the middle reel 32M) are "replay" symbols, four of which are provided on the middle reel 32M, and the second group of winning symbols on the middle reel 32M (the 12th small win symbol, the 13th small win symbol, and the 16th small win symbol on the middle reel 32M) are "replay" symbols and "red shell" symbols, five of which are provided on the middle reel 32M, and since there are more winning symbols in the second group, the small win symbol of the second group is set to be established preferentially. In contrast, in the number of medals priority control, the small win symbol of the first group, which has a larger number of medals paid out, is set to be established preferentially. In other words, when the middle push bell 1 is operated in the order of middle → left → right, if the number of symbols priority control is applied, it will be controlled so that the 12th, 13th or 16th small prize wins are achieved, whereas if the number of coins priority control is applied, it will be controlled so that the 1st small prize win is achieved.

When the center push bell 1 is selected and the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the order of center → left → right corresponding to the first minor win, if the number of symbols priority control is applied, the first minor win symbol on the center reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, the 12th and 13th minor win symbols are the "replay" symbols, and the 16th minor win symbol is the "white 7" symbol. In this case, when the center stop switch 43 is operated first, if it is possible to stop the "bell" symbol and the "replay" symbol or the "white 7" symbol simultaneously on the effective line (upper row), the stop control is performed so that the "replay" symbol or the "white 7" symbol is stopped on the effective line with priority. The "replay" symbol and the "white 7" symbol are arranged so that the distance between the symbols is 4 symbols or less, so regardless of the operation timing, the 12th, 13th, and 16th minor win symbols will stop on the effective line. As described above, the remaining left reel 32L and right reel 32R are controlled to maximize the number of small wins possible in relation to the symbols already stopped. In other words, when the middle push bell 1 is won, if symbol number priority control is applied, even if the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, there is no room for the first small win, and the 12th, 13th, or 16th small win will be achieved.

In contrast, when the center push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of center → left → right corresponding to the first minor role, if the number priority control is applied, when the center stop switch 43 is operated first, if it is possible to stop the "bell" symbol and the "replay" symbol or the "white 7" symbol on the active line (upper row) at the same time, the stop control is performed so that the "bell" symbol, which is the first minor role symbol, is stopped on the active line with priority. Since the "bell" symbols are arranged so that the spacing between the symbols is 4 symbols or less, the first minor role symbol stops on the active line regardless of the operation timing. As for the first minor role, not only the center reel 32M but also the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R are arranged so that the spacing between the symbols is 4 symbols or less, it is possible to stop the first minor role symbol on the active line regardless of the operation timing. Therefore, if the middle push bell 1 is won and the buttons are operated in the order of middle → left → right, and number priority control is applied, the first small win will be achieved regardless of the timing of the operation.

Not limited to the above-mentioned middle order push bell 1, in each push order bell, in the operation sequence corresponding to the first small prize, multiple small prizes are set, including not only the first small prize but also the fourth small prize to the 27th small prize, which will pay out one medal (Figure 21). And in any push order bell, in the operation sequence corresponding to the first small prize, the number of winning symbols in the group different from the first small prize is set to be greater.

In this embodiment, regardless of the game state, such as the normal game state, the carryover state of 1 BB to 2 BB, and the 1 BB state or 2 BB state, the number priority control is basically applied to set the priority between each small role. In other words, regardless of the game state, even if the operation sequence when the push order bell is won corresponds to the operation sequence corresponding to the 4th to 27th small roles in addition to the 1st small role, the number priority control will give priority to the winning of the 1st small role, which will pay out 7 medals, rather than the 4th to 27th small roles, which will pay out 1 medal.

In other words, in a game in which the push order bell is won, if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in a sequence that corresponds to an operation sequence that includes the first small win, the first small win will be won and seven medals will be paid out. In contrast, in a game in which the push order bell is won, if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in a sequence that corresponds to an operation sequence that does not include the first small win, the first small win will not be won and the fourth to 27th small wins will be won and one medal will be paid out, or none of the small wins will be won and no medals will be paid out.

By the way, if the common bell is won, the first small prize winning flag is set, and the fourth to 27th small prize winning flags, which pay out one medal each, are not set. Therefore, if the common bell is won, the first small prize will be won regardless of the operation sequence and operation timing, even if the number of symbols priority control is applied.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, if it is determined in step S411 that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process for setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the winning combination is lined up on an active line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on an active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the symbols stopped on the lower row of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and it is determined whether or not a winning combination is established on the active line. If a winning combination is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. If the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the payout number corresponding to the winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state and an error occurrence process is performed to notify the user of the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After the payout determination process, bonus state processing is executed in step S414. The bonus state processing includes processing such as transitioning to a bonus state such as the first BB state or the second BB state based on the winning result. This bonus state processing will be described in detail later. In the following step S415, winning result response processing is executed. In the winning result response processing, processing such as transitioning the display mode based on the winning result is executed. This winning result response processing will be described in detail later.

After the winning result processing is performed, the second section display processing is executed in step S416. The second section display processing is processing related to the display control of the instruction monitor 68, and this processing will be explained in detail later. After that, in step S417, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 knows the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control processing is terminated.

Next, we will provide an overview of the medal payout process in step S212.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether the payout number set in the payout information storage area is 0. If the payout number is 0, it means that the previous payout determination process determined that no small winning combination was achieved. In such a case, it is determined whether any of the 1st replay winning combination to the 11th replay winning combination was achieved based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. If none of the replay winning combinations was achieved, the medal payout process is terminated as is, and if any of the replay winning combinations was achieved, a replay setting process is performed to change the play mode to the replay mode, and the medal payout process is terminated. Note that in the start waiting process (step S204) described above, if it is determined that the current play mode is the replay mode, an automatic insertion process is performed.

On the other hand, if the payout number set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the payout number is paid out, and the medal payout process is terminated. Specifically, when the credit counter count value has not reached the upper limit (the number of medals stored is 50), the payout number is added to the credit counter count value, and the added value is displayed on the credit display unit 60. When the credit counter count value has reached the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit during the addition of the payout number, the medal payout rotating plate is driven, and medals are paid out from the hopper device 51 to the medal receiving tray 50 via the medal discharge port 49. Note that the medal payout process also performs a process of changing the payout number displayed on the payout number display unit 62 in accordance with the payout of medals. When the current game state is BB state, the payout number is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout number counter described later, and the remaining payout number displayed on the remaining payout number display unit 61 is subtracted.

<Bonus state processing>
The bonus state process in step S414 in the reel control process will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 22. As described above, the bonus state process is a process that is started between the payout determination process (step S413) and the winning result process (step S415) in the reel control process (Fig. 20).

First, in step S501, it is determined whether the current game state is a bonus state, i.e., whether the current game state is the first BB state or the second BB state. Whether the current game state is the first BB state or the second BB state can be determined by the presence or absence of a first BB state flag or a second BB state flag that are set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106 when transitioning to the first BB state or the second BB state. That is, in step S501, if neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is set, it is determined that the current state is not the first BB state or the second BB state, and the process proceeds to step S502.

In step S502, it is determined whether the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set, and whether either of the BBs has been won. If neither of the BB winning flags is set, the bonus state processing ends. If either of the BB winning flags is set, the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, it is determined whether or not a first BB win or a second BB win has occurred. If neither of the BB wins has occurred, the bonus state processing ends. In contrast, if it is determined that a first BB win or a second BB win has occurred, the process proceeds to step S504. In step S504, the BB win flag corresponding to the currently won BB is cleared.

Then, in step S505, the BB status flag corresponding to the currently won BB is set in the various flag storage area 106d. That is, if the first BB win is achieved, the first BB status flag is set, and if the second BB win is achieved, the second BB status flag is set. As a result, from the next game onwards, a positive judgment will be made in step S501.

In the next step S506, a process is executed to set the BB start command corresponding to the currently won BB as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this bonus state process is terminated. That is, if a first BB win is achieved, a first BB start command is set, and if a second BB win is achieved, a second BB start command is set. By receiving the first BB start command and the second BB start command, the display control device 81 is able to grasp the type of bonus state to transition to, and executes a process to perform a BB start performance corresponding to the bonus state to transition to on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc.

If the determination in step S501 is positive and the game is in the first BB state or the second BB state, the process proceeds to step S507, where the BB game counter provided in the various counter area 106e is incremented by 1. The BB game counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games in the bonus state (first BB state or second BB state), and is a type of special information that is updated according to the progress of the game from the time of winning the BB, which allows the game to transition to the BB state as a special state, until the BB state ends.

Then, in step S508, it is determined whether any minor winning combination has been achieved as the game result of this game.

Here, we will explain the BB state lottery table used for the lottery for each game in the first BB state and the second BB state with reference to Figure 23.

In this embodiment, the first BB state and the second BB state both use the same BB state lottery table, and the contents of the lottery results and the winning probability of each game in the first BB state and the second BB state are the same. In addition, in the BB state lottery table, the point values PV of index values IV = 1 to 10, 12 to 23 are the same as those in the normal game state lottery table and the carryover state lottery table, and the winning probability of these index values IV = 1 to 10, 12 to 23 is the same in the normal game state, the carryover state, the first BB state, and the second BB state. In contrast, the point value PV is set so that the winning probability of the common bell with index value IV = 11 is higher in the first BB state and the second BB state than in the normal game state and the carryover state, and in that respect, the first BB state and the second BB state are more advantageous for the player than the normal game state and the carryover state.

In step S508, it is determined whether or not a small prize of index value IV = 11 to 23 has been won. If a replay prize of index value IV = 1 to 10 has been won, or if the result is a miss, or if a small prize of index value IV = 11 to 23 has been won but the prize has not been won and the prize has been missed, the bonus state processing ends. If any small prize has been won, the process proceeds to step S509, and the process of adding the number of medals to be paid out when a prize is won in this game to the BB payout counter provided in the various counter area 106e is executed. Note that the number of medals to be paid out can be determined by using the result of the payout determination process in the previous step S412. The BB payout counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to grasp the number of medals to be paid out in the bonus state (first BB state or second BB state), and is a type of special information that is updated according to the progress of the game from the BB win that allows the transition to the BB state as a special state to the end of the BB state.

After executing the process of step S509, in step S510, it is determined whether the BB payout counter is equal to or greater than "71", which is set as the upper limit payout number for the BB state. If the determination in step S510 is negative, the bonus state processing ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step S510 is positive, the process proceeds to step S511, and processing to end the bonus state is executed.

That is, in step S511, a process for initializing the BB game counter is executed. By this process, the BB game counter as special information is set to the initial value (0). In the following step S512, a process for initializing the BB payout counter is executed. By this process, the BB payout counter as special information is set to the initial value (0). In the following step S513, a process for clearing the BB state flag corresponding to the bonus state to be ended this time is executed. That is, when the first BB state is to be ended, the first BB state flag is cleared, and when the second BB state is to be ended, the second BB state flag is cleared. Then, in step S514, a process for setting the BB end command corresponding to the bonus state to be ended this time as the output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this bonus state process is ended. That is, when the first BB state is to be ended, the first BB end command is set, and when the second BB state is to be ended, the second BB end command is set. By receiving the first BB end command and the second BB end command, the display control device 81 is able to determine the type of bonus state that is ending, and executes processing to perform a BB end effect corresponding to the ending bonus state on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc.

In this embodiment, as described above, the winning probability of each replay result and small role is the same in the normal game state and the carryover state and in the first BB state and the second BB state, except for the winning probability of the common bell (IV = 11). In the BB state lottery table, the point value PV of the index value IV = 24, 25 corresponding to the first BB and the second BB is set to 0, so the number of medal increases or decreases that can be expected per game is the same, except for the common bell, in the first BB state and the second BB state, compared to the carryover state in which the point value PV of IV = 24, 25 is similarly set to 0. The winning probability of the common bell is about 1 in 6550 in the carryover state, and about 1 in 3280 in the first BB state and the second BB state, and although it is easier to win in the first BB state and the second BB state, the difference is very small. As shown in FIG. 24, assuming that there is a 1 in 6 probability that the operation sequence corresponding to the first minor prize will match when the push order bell is won, in the carryover state, a decrease of approximately 1.51 medals can be expected per game (net increase in medals minus approximately 1.51 medals), and even in the first BB state and second BB state, a decrease of approximately 1.51 medals can be expected per game (net increase in medals minus approximately 1.51 medals).

On the other hand, when the push order bell is won, if the push order notification is performed (AT mode), it becomes possible to establish the first minor prize in all push order bells that are won with a probability of about 1 in 1.5, and in the carryover state, an increase of about 2.06 medals per game can be expected (net increase in number of medals plus about 2.06 medals), and in the first BB state and the second BB state, an increase of about 2.06 medals per game can be expected (net increase in number of medals plus about 2.06 medals). In other words, even when the push order notification is performed, it is set so that there is almost no difference in the expected medal increase value between the carryover state and the first BB state or the second BB state. However, in this embodiment, it has a characteristic configuration in which a transition to the first BB state or the second BB state occurs in a situation where the push order notification is performed, and an event that is advantageous to the player may occur. Therefore, first, the configuration for performing the push order notification will be described, and then the configuration related to the first BB state and the second BB state will be described.

<Lottery result processing>
First, the lottery result response process performed in step S310 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 25. The lottery result response process is a process performed after the lottery process for each game is performed, and is a process for performing a lottery for transition to an AT mode (assist time mode, navigation mode, specific state) as a mode in which a push order notification is generated based on the lottery result of the game.

First, in steps S601 to S603, a process is executed to determine whether the number of bets in the current game is a specific number (specific set number) that is specified (set) in association with the game state. That is, in step S601, it is determined whether either the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and a determination is made as to whether the game to be started this time is in any of the BB states. If the game is not in the BB state, in step S602, it is determined whether the number of bets is "3". Also, if the game is in the BB state, in step S603, it is determined whether the number of bets is "3". If a negative determination is made in step S602 or step S603, and the number of bets in the current game is not a specific number that is specified in association with the game state, the lottery result response process is terminated without performing the display mode process (processing related to the instruction function) from step S604 onwards.

As already explained, in this embodiment, since only a 3-bet game can be executed in any game state, no negative judgment is made in step S602 or step S603, and all of them will be positive judgments. In other words, in the normal game state, carryover state, first BB state, and second BB state, the processing for the display mode from step S604 onwards (processing related to the instruction function) is executed for each game.

If a positive judgment is made in step S602 or step S603, it is judged in step S604 whether or not an advantageous zone flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As described above, in this slot machine 10, with regard to the occurrence or non-occurrence of push order notifications, etc., advantageous zones in which such notifications may occur and normal zones in which such notifications may not occur are set. The advantageous zone flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that the current game is in an advantageous zone, and is a flag that is set when a transition to an advantageous zone occurs and is cleared when a transition to a normal zone occurs.

If the advantageous zone flag is not set, this means that the current game is in the normal zone, in which case the advantageous zone transition lottery process is executed in step S605, and then this lottery result response process is terminated.

In the advantageous zone transition lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 26, the lottery result of the current game is grasped in step S701. Then, in step S702, the advantageous zone transition lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. In the advantageous zone transition lottery table, as shown in FIG. 28, the transition rate to the advantageous zone (the winning probability of the advantageous zone transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. As shown in FIG. 28, the following are set as triggers for the transition lottery to the advantageous zone: normal lip A, normal lip B, normal lip C, chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, cherry C, push order bell, and watermelon. In other words, the result with the same winning probability in the normal game state, carryover state, first BB state, and second BB state is set as the trigger for the transition lottery to the advantageous zone.

After obtaining the lottery table in step S702, a process of obtaining a random number for the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed in step S703. The random number for the advantageous zone transition lottery is generated by using a dedicated counter in the various counter areas 106e, which is updated at a predetermined interval, and the latest updated value of the counter is obtained in step S703. Then, in step S704, an advantageous zone transition lottery is executed, and in step S705, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery has been won. If the player has not won, the advantageous zone transition lottery process ends. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the lottery table is set so that the advantageous zone transition lottery has a 100% probability regardless of the trigger role. In this case, if it is determined that the game result grasped in step S701 is a trigger role for the transition lottery (not a losing result), it is also possible to omit the processes in steps S702 to S705.

If it is determined in step S705 that the transition lottery has been won, in step S706, a process is executed to set the advantageous zone winning game flag in the various flag storage area 106d, and then the advantageous zone transition lottery process is terminated. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that the transition lottery to the advantageous zone has been won in the current game.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery result response process, if it is determined in step S604 that the advantageous zone flag is set, the process proceeds to step S606. In step S606, it is determined whether the AT mode winning flag or any of the AT mode flags are set in the various flag storage area 106d. The AT mode winning flag is a flag that is set when the transition lottery to the AT mode is won. Also, when transitioning to the AT mode, the AT mode flag is set according to the type of AT mode. In other words, in step S606, it is determined whether the transition to the AT mode has already been confirmed or has already been confirmed. If neither flag is set in step S606 and the transition to the AT mode has not yet been confirmed, the AT lottery process is executed in step S607. On the other hand, if any of the flags is set in step S606, the AT addition process is executed in step S608.

<AT lottery processing>
First, the AT lottery process in step S607 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S801, a process is executed to subtract 1 from the ceiling counter provided in the various counter areas 106e. The ceiling counter is a counter for causing a transition to the AT mode regardless of whether the AT mode transition lottery is won or not (without winning) when the number of games after transition to the advantageous zone reaches the ceiling game number, and is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games remaining up to the ceiling game number. The ceiling game number is set at the time of transition to the advantageous zone. Incidentally, as described above, the AT lottery process is executed when the number of bets is a specific prescribed number according to the gaming state, and therefore the ceiling counter is subtracted in games where the number of bets is a specific prescribed number according to the gaming state.

After the ceiling counter is decremented in step S801, it is determined in step S802 whether the ceiling counter has reached 0. If it has not reached 0, the process for the AT mode transition lottery is executed in steps S803 to S807.

That is, in step S803, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In this embodiment, the display modes with different winning probabilities in the AT mode transition lottery are set to be the normal mode and the CZ mode, which is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than the normal mode, and the CZ mode flag is a flag that allows the CPU to know that it is the CZ mode.

If the CZ mode flag is not set in step S803, a process is executed in step S804 to obtain a normal AT mode transition lottery table from the various table storage area 105a. On the other hand, if the CZ mode flag is set in step S803, a process is executed in step S805 to obtain a CZ AT mode transition lottery table.

As shown in FIG. 28, the normal AT mode transition lottery table and the CZ AT mode transition lottery table each have a winning probability set for the AT mode transition lottery according to the lottery results of the game. For example, in the case of an AT mode transition lottery triggered by Chance Eye A, the AT mode transition lottery has a 1% probability for normal use and a 3% probability for CZ use. In other words, the CZ AT mode transition lottery table is set to make it easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than the normal AT mode transition lottery table. Also, normal lip A, normal lip B, and normal lip C are set so that while normal use does not result in an AT mode transition win, CZ use can result in an AT mode transition win.

After acquiring the AT mode transition lottery table in step S804 or step S805, the AT mode transition lottery process is executed in step S806 based on the acquired transition lottery table. Then, in step S807, it is determined whether or not the AT mode transition has been selected.

If it is determined in step S807 that the AT mode transition has been selected, or if it is determined in step S802 that the ceiling counter is 0, the process for the AT mode win is executed in steps S808 to S810. If it is determined in step S807 that the AT mode transition has not been selected, the process for the AT mode non-win is executed in steps S811 to S814.

In the AT mode winning process, in step S808, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is set, in step S809, a process is executed to clear the CZ mode flag. By executing the process of step S809, the CZ mode ends. If the CZ mode flag is not set in step S808, or after the CZ mode flag is cleared in step S809, a process is executed to set the AT mode winning flag in step S810. By executing the process of step S810, a positive determination is made in step S606 in the next lottery result response process.

On the other hand, in the process for non-winning the AT mode, in step S811, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set, and if it is not set, in step S812, the CZ mode transition lottery process is executed. In the CZ mode transition lottery process, the CZ mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 28 is obtained, and a lottery is performed on whether or not to transition to CZ mode based on the lottery result of the current game and the random number for the lottery. In the CZ mode transition lottery table, the more likely the result is to win the AT mode transition lottery, the more likely it is to win the CZ mode transition lottery. Therefore, if the result is such that it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery but the AT mode transition lottery is not won, it becomes easier to win the CZ mode, and the player is rescued.

After executing the CZ mode transition lottery process, in step S813, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode transition lottery has been won, and if it has been won, in step S814, a process is executed to set the CZ mode win flag. If it is determined in step S811 that the player is in CZ mode, or if it is determined in step S813 that the player has not won the CZ mode transition lottery, the AT lottery process is terminated.

After executing the process of step S810 or step S814, a process for setting the premonition mode is performed in steps S815 to S818. The premonition mode is a mode that suggests that the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery has been won in a game before the notification of the win in these transition lotteries is made. In step S815, a process is performed to determine the number of games in the premonition mode by lottery. In the process of step S815, the number of games in the premonition mode is determined randomly from, for example, 0 to 32 games. Note that the number of games in the premonition mode may be set to be different depending on the lottery result of the game that triggered the transition win, and the number of games in the premonition mode may be set to be different depending on the lottery result of the game that triggered the transition win between the AT mode transition lottery and the CZ mode transition lottery, even if the lottery result of the same game is different.

After executing the premonition game number lottery process in step S815, a process is executed in step S816 to input a value corresponding to the premonition game number to the premonition counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The premonition counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the remaining number of games in the premonition mode, and is a counter that is decremented by one each time one game is played in the premonition mode. Then, in step S817, a premonition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d, and in step S818, a process is executed to set the premonition command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the AT lottery process is terminated. The premonition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the premonition mode is in progress. In addition, the premonition command includes information corresponding to the number of games in the premonition mode, and by receiving the premonition command, the display control device 81 grasps the number of games in the premonition mode and controls the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. to execute a corresponding effect (premonition effect) during the premonition mode.

<AT top-up processing>
Next, the AT addition process executed in step S608 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 29. As already described, the AT addition process is a process executed in a situation where the AT mode winning flag or any of the AT mode flags is set, and is a process for adding the number of continued games in the AT mode.

In the AT addition process, first in step S901, the lottery result of the current game is ascertained. Then, in step S902, a process is executed to obtain the addition lottery table from the various table storage area 105a.

In this embodiment, the AT modes are a first AT mode and a second AT mode with different probabilities of winning the additional prize, and the second AT mode is set to have a higher probability of winning the additional prize than the first AT mode. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, in the additional prize lottery table, the probability of winning the additional prize is set according to the lottery result of the game and the type of AT mode. For example, in the additional prize lottery triggered by Cherry A, the first AT mode has a 5% probability of winning the additional prize lottery, while the second AT mode has a 10% probability of winning the additional prize lottery.

In step S903, a lottery for adding is executed, and in step S904, it is determined whether or not the lottery for adding is won. If the lottery for adding is not won, the AT adding process is terminated. If the lottery for adding is won, the lottery process for the number of games to be added is executed in step S905. In the lottery process for the number of games to be added, the table for the number of games to be added is obtained from the various table storage area 105a, and the number of games to be added this time is determined by lottery. As shown in FIG. 30, the table for the number of games to be added is set so that the number of games to be added differs depending on the lottery result of the game that triggered the addition. For example, when the addition is triggered by a normal lip A, an average of 150 games are added, while when the addition is triggered by a cherry A, an average of 15 games are added. In other words, when the addition is triggered by a trigger that is unlikely to win the lottery, the number of games to be added is greater.

After executing the process for drawing out the number of added games in step S905, a process is executed in step S906 to add the current number of added games to the AT game counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The AT game counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to know the number of remaining games in the AT mode. After executing the process in step S906, a process is executed in step S907 to set the added command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the AT added processing is terminated. The display control device 81, which has received the added command, executes a process to perform an added notification effect corresponding to the addition on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64.

The notification of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is executed in the processing of steps S609 to S612 in the lottery result response processing (FIG. 27). That is, after the AT lottery processing or the AT addition processing is executed in the processing of step S607 or step S608, the processing for notifying the push order is executed in steps S609 to S612.

＜Outline of push order notification＞
Prior to describing the process for pressing order notification executed in steps S609 to S612, an overview of the pressing order notification executed by the instruction monitor 68 and the pressing order notification effect executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described. Note that the pressing order notification and the pressing order notification effect can also be referred to as, for example, pressing order navigation, sequence notification, or mode notification. The instruction monitor 68 is connected to the main control unit 101, and the pressing order notification is performed by the main control unit 101. In contrast, the auxiliary display unit 65 is connected to the display control unit 81, and the pressing order notification effect is performed by the display control unit 81.

First, the configuration of the instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 31(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode and the display content of the instruction monitor 68.

As shown in FIG. 31(a), the indication monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each display segment N1 to N8 has an individual light source made of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of each of these individual light sources, it is possible to light up any one display segment, or any combination of display segments. This allows the indication monitor 68 to display a specific symbol (including letters and numbers) individually. Note that each of the individual light sources emits light of the same color, so the same color is displayed on each of the display segments N1 to N8.

Regarding each of the display segments N1 to N8 in more detail, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments, and the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are arranged so that they can at least display the numbers "1" to "6". The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged to the side of the lower right part of the area in which the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are arranged. Therefore, the indication monitor 68 can at least display "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

In addition, as long as the indication monitor 68 can display multiple patterns of symbols individually, the shape and arrangement of each display segment N1 to N8 can be arbitrary, and a configuration using seven segments instead of eight segments, or nine segments, etc., may be used. In addition, it is not essential that the colors displayed in each display segment N1 to N8 are the same, and the colors displayed in each display segment N1 to N8 can be changed as appropriate. In addition, it is not essential to control the lighting or extinguishing of each display segment N1 to N8 by controlling the on/off of a light source, and as long as the display control can be performed individually for each display segment N1 to N8, a segment display device may be configured with a single backlight and liquid crystal display. Furthermore, instead of applying a segment display to each display area, symbols may be displayed using other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used to notify the operation sequence of the push order role. For example, as shown in FIG. 31(b), when the operation sequence of each stop switch 42-44 is "left" → "middle" → "right" to provide an advantageous winning mode for the player, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are lit and "1" is displayed. Also, when the operation sequence of each stop switch 42-44 is "right" → "left" → "middle" to provide an advantageous winning mode for the player, the first display segment N1, the second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are lit and "5" is displayed. In other words, the numbers (symbols) displayed on each display segment N1 to N7 correspond one-to-one to the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 to stop based on the numbers (symbols) displayed on the display segments N1 to N7, the player can win in an advantageous manner.

The eighth display segment N8 is lit in a game in which a predetermined start condition is met, including a notification condition that transitions to a favorable zone and creates a situation in which a push order notification may occur. It is also turned off when the AT mode ends and there is a transition from the favorable zone to the normal zone.

In other words, an advantageous zone (advantageous state, specific state) is a zone in which the operation order of the push order bell and the like is more easily notified, making it easier for the player to win in an advantageous manner, and the eighth display segment N8 serves as a zone indicator (specific notification means) that lights up during specific zones in which the player can actually benefit from the push order notification in the advantageous zone, and turns off during normal zones that are not advantageous zones, and during non-specific zones that are not specific zones even if they are advantageous zones.

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order indicator and the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is disposed near the side of the payout number display unit 62 on the gaming panel 25. In other words, the instruction monitor 68 is disposed above the stop switches 42 to 44 etc. operated by the player, in other words, it is not disposed on the decorative panel, which is the front part of the gaming machine, below the position where the stop switches 42 to 44 etc. are provided. Therefore, the eighth display segment N8 is prevented from being hidden by the hand etc. operating the stop switches 42 to 44 etc., and it can be said that it is disposed in a position where it is easily visible to the player. In addition, since it is disposed near the payout number display unit 62 where the player who is playing the game aiming to win medals can easily focus on it, it can be said that the player is prevented from overlooking it.

Furthermore, the brightness of the corresponding LED is set so that the eighth display segment N8 in the instruction monitor 68 is brighter than the brightness of the surrounding display parts (e.g., the payout number display part 62 and the backlight of the gaming panel 25) (more specifically, twice as bright as the surrounding display parts). Therefore, even if the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display parts are both controlled to emit light (when they are in a lit state), the eighth display segment N8 stands out. The illuminance of the corresponding LED is also set so that the eighth display segment N8 has a higher illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine than the surrounding display parts (more specifically, twice as bright as the surrounding display parts). This configuration also improves the visibility of the eighth display segment N8, and prevents the eighth display segment N8 from being overlooked when it is in a lit state.

Next, the push order notification effect performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described with reference to FIG. 32. Here, the push order notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described using as an example a case where the push order role is won when the operation order to be notified this time is center → right → left.

As shown in FIG. 32(a), in the auxiliary display unit 65, of the three button displays arranged in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated first (the middle button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 in the figure) is marked with the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. In addition, each button display is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning role (yellow for bell, blue for replay, etc.). This allows the player to recognize the winning role in the current game and that the stop switch that should be operated first is the middle stop switch 43. In addition, in the auxiliary display unit 65, the right button display is displayed with the number 2 and the left button display is displayed with the number 3 to indicate that the stop switch that should be operated next is the right stop switch 44 and the stop switch that should be operated last is the left stop switch 42.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. 32(b), the center button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 disappears on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 is displayed large. This allows the player to confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 has been completed, and that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44.

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. 32(c), the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the left button display corresponding to the left stop switch 42 is displayed large. This allows the player to confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 has been completed, and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42.

To explain the timing of the push order notification, it is set to be executed during the inactive period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from when the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts, through the acceleration period, until the reels reach constant speed rotation. By configuring the push order notification to be executed at a timing before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective in this way, it is possible for the player to recognize the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 and then operate the stop switches 42 to 44 as desired, allowing the game to progress at a good tempo.

The process for notifying the push order in steps S609 to S612 will be explained.

That is, in step S609, it is determined whether the lottery result of this game was a push order bell win. If the push order bell win was a win, in step S610, it is determined whether the first AT mode flag or the second AT mode flag is set. If either AT mode flag is set, in step S611, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that a push order notification corresponding to the first minor win is performed according to the type of push order bell this time. Then, in step S612, a process is executed to set a push order notification command including information on the operation sequence corresponding to the first minor win as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this push order notification process is terminated. The display control device 81, which has received this push order notification command, controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 so that a push order notification performance corresponding to the first minor win is performed.

If the push order bell is not selected in step S609, or if none of the AT mode flags are set in step S610, the lottery result response process ends.

<Winning Result Processing>
Next, the winning result corresponding process executed in step S415 in the reel control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 33. In the winning result corresponding process, a process for starting or ending the AT mode etc. is performed according to the game result.

In the winning result response process, first, in steps S1001 to S1003, similar to steps S601 to S603, a process is executed to determine whether or not the number of bets in the current game is the specified number. If the number of bets in the current game is not the specified number, the winning result response process ends without performing the display mode processing (processing related to the instruction function) from step S1004 onwards.

If the number of bets on the current game is a specific prescribed number, in step S1004, the premonition flag is set and it is determined whether or not the game is in premonition mode. If the game is in premonition mode, in step S1005, the premonition counter is decremented by 1. Then, in step S1006, it is determined whether or not the premonition counter has reached 0, and if it has not reached 0, the winning result response process is terminated. On the other hand, if the premonition counter has reached 0, in step S1007, the premonition flag is cleared, and then in step S1008, the presence or absence of an AT mode winning flag is determined to determine whether or not the current premonition mode is based on winning the AT mode transition lottery. If the premonition mode is based on winning the AT mode transition lottery, in step S1009, the AT type determination process is executed.

The AT type determination process in step S1009 is a process for determining whether the AT mode to be started this time is the first AT mode or the second AT mode. That is, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 34, in step S1101, an AT type lottery process is performed to determine which AT mode to start by lottery. In such a lottery process, for example, the type of the current AT mode is determined by lottery according to the set value, the type of the previous AT mode, the number of medals increased in the advantageous zone, the number of games in the advantageous zone, etc., or randomly. In the following step S1102, it is determined whether the processing result of step S1101 was the first AT mode. If the current AT mode is determined as the first AT mode, a process for setting the first AT mode flag is executed in step S1103, and a process for setting the first AT command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in the following step S1104, and then this AT type determination process is terminated. Upon receiving the first AT command, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. to display a notification that the AT mode being started is the first AT mode.

If the AT mode is not the first AT mode but the second AT mode in step S1102, the process executes a process of setting the second AT mode flag in step S1105, and then executes a process of setting the second AT command as an output target to the display control device 81 in the following step S1106, and then ends this AT type determination process. Based on receiving the second AT command, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. to display a notification that the AT mode being started this time is the second AT mode.

In the winning result corresponding process, after executing the AT type determination process, a process of clearing the AT mode winning flag is executed in step S1010. Then, in step S1011, a process of setting the number of games in the AT mode is executed. More specifically, in step S1011, a process of inputting "50" as the initial value of the number of games in the AT mode to the AT game counter provided in the various counter area 106e is executed. The AT game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games remaining in the AT mode, and is a counter that is decremented by one each time one game is played in the AT mode. In other words, in this embodiment, regardless of the type of AT mode to be started, the initial number of games is set to 50 games uniformly. In the following step S1012, a process of setting the AT start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this winning result corresponding process is terminated. In the display control device 81, based on the reception of the AT start command, a notification performance that the AT mode will be started is controlled to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. When an AT start command is output, as described above, the first AT command or the second AT command is output, and when the display control device 81 performs a notification display indicating that an AT mode is about to start, it is possible to perform a notification display of the type of AT mode that is to be started in addition to the notification display indicating that the mode is about to start.

In step S1008, when it is determined that the present premonition mode is not based on winning the AT mode transition lottery, it means that the present premonition mode is based on winning the CZ mode transition lottery. In this case, in step S1013, a process of clearing the CZ mode winning flag is executed. Then, in step S1014, a process of setting the CZ mode flag is executed, and in step S1015, a process of setting the number of games in the CZ mode is executed. More specifically, in step S1015, a process of inputting "10" as the initial value of the number of games in the CZ mode to the CZ game counter provided in the various counter area 106e is executed. The CZ game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games remaining in the CZ mode, and is a counter that is decremented by one each time one game is played in the CZ mode. In other words, in this embodiment, the CZ mode is set to continue for a uniform 10 games. Then, in step S1016, a process is executed to set the CZ start command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the winning result response process is terminated. Based on receiving the CZ start command, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. to display a notification that the CZ mode is starting.

If the premonition flag is not set in step S1004, proceed to step S1017. In step S1017, the presence or absence of the CZ mode flag is checked to determine whether or not the game is in CZ mode. If the game is in CZ mode, a process of decrementing the CZ game counter by 1 is executed in step S1018. Then, in step S1019, it is determined whether or not the CZ game counter has reached 0. If it has not reached 0, the winning result response process is terminated. If it has reached 0, a process of clearing the CZ mode flag is executed in step S1020, and a process of setting the CZ end command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S1021, and then the winning result response process is terminated. Based on the reception of the CZ end command, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. to perform a notification effect indicating that the CZ mode is ending.

If it is determined in step S1017 that the game is not in the CZ mode, the game proceeds to step S1022. In step S1022, the presence or absence of each AT mode flag is grasped to determine whether the game is in the AT mode. If the game is in the AT mode, a process of subtracting 1 from the AT game counter is executed in step S1023. Then, in step S1024, it is determined whether the AT game counter has become 0, and if it is not 0, the winning result corresponding process is terminated. If it is 0, a process of clearing the current AT mode flag is executed in step S1025, and a process of setting an AT end flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step S1026. The AT end flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the AT mode has ended in the current game. In this embodiment, the advantageous zone also ends when the AT mode ends, and the AT end flag can also be said to be a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that one end condition of the advantageous zone has been established. Then, in step S1027, the AT end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and the winning result response process is terminated. Based on receiving the AT end command, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. to display a notification that the AT mode is ending.

<Management of number of games and difference in number of coins in advantageous zone>
Next, the first interval display process and the second interval display process will be described, which are used to control the eighth display segment N8 as an interval display device and to manage the number of games and the difference in number of coins in the advantageous interval.

<First section display process>
First, the first section display process will be described with reference to Fig. 35. The first section display process is a process carried out in step S314 in the lottery process (Fig. 17), and is carried out after the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and a lottery for switching the display mode is carried out based on the lottery result (lottery result corresponding process).

In step S1201, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is being displayed, more specifically, whether the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As already explained, when the eighth display segment N8 is being lit, it indicates when the advantageous section is a specific section in which at least the notification conditions for the push order notification to occur are met. If a negative determination is made in step S1201 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S1202.

In step S1202, it is determined whether the advantageous zone winning game flag is set. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won in the advantageous zone transition lottery process, and is a flag for the CPU 102 to identify that it is the winning game. If the advantageous zone winning game flag is set, a process is executed in step S1203 to clear the advantageous zone winning game flag. Then, in step S1204, the advantageous zone flag is set. By setting the advantageous zone flag, a transition is made from the normal zone to the advantageous zone. Then, in step S1205, a process is executed to count the number of games in the advantageous zone, more specifically, to start measuring the advantageous zone game number AG of the various counter areas 106e. The advantageous zone game number AG corresponds to a grasping means for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous zone, and a process is executed to add one for each game in the advantageous zone.

In the next step S1206, favorable zone transition processing is executed. Favorable zone transition processing is processing related to the instruction function that is performed when a transition to a favorable zone occurs. Favorable zone transition processing will be explained in detail later.

After executing the process of step S1206, in step S1207, the display of the section indicator is started by lighting the eighth display segment N8. In addition, when the main control device 101 starts displaying the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator with the lighting state, it outputs a command for sound output to the display control device 81 so that a predetermined sound effect (for example, a mechanical sound such as "Gago!") is output from the speaker 64. The display control device 81 controls the speaker 64 so that the predetermined sound effect is emitted based on the command for sound output. Note that when the display of the eighth display segment N8 starts, a configuration may be adopted in which a performance is generated in the auxiliary display unit 65 or another display unit. In this case, a corresponding command may be output to the display control device 81, and the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. may be controlled so that the corresponding performance is performed by the display control device 81. That is, in this embodiment, the zone indicator starts displaying the button as the notification conditions for a push order notification to occur are met by moving into the favorable zone, and the specific zone within the favorable zone where a push order notification can occur is set to be equal to the favorable zone.

If it is determined in step S1201 that the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed as a zone indicator, then in step S1208, processing is executed to continue displaying during the favorable zone. Specifically, the eighth display segment N8 is caused to continue to be lit.

If it is determined in step S1202 that the advantageous zone winning game flag is not set, after the display start process of the zone indicator is executed in step S1207, and after the display continuation process of the zone indicator is executed in step S1208, the process proceeds to step S1209. In step S1209, it is determined whether or not the AT mode flag is set. If the AT mode flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1210. In step S1210, a process is executed to add 1 to the role ratio first counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The role ratio first counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which no push order notification is performed, or in which no medal increase is expected even if a push order notification is performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1209 that the AT mode flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1211. In step S1211, a process is executed to add 1 to the role ratio second counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The role ratio second counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which an increase in medals is expected due to the push order notification.

After executing the processing of step S1210 or step S1211, a role ratio calculation process is executed in step S1212. In this process, the value of the role ratio second counter is divided by the sum of the role ratio first counter and the role ratio second counter (total number of games). In other words, the role ratio calculation process is a process that calculates the proportion of the number of games in which an increase in medals is expected due to the push order notification out of the total number of games. Then, in step S1213, a process is executed to display the calculation result of step S1212 on the role ratio monitor 77.

As shown in FIG. 5, the role ratio monitor 77 has multiple 7-segment display sections consisting of seven display segments. Specifically, the role ratio monitor 77 has a first display section 77a, a second display section 77b, a third display section 77c, a fourth display section 77d, and a fifth display section 77e as 7-segment display sections. The display segments in the first display section 77a to the fifth display section 77e have individual light sources made of LEDs, similar to the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light up only one display segment, and to light up any combination of display segments. As a result, each role ratio monitor 77 is designed to display a specific symbol (including alphabets and numbers), and in particular, the role ratio monitor 77 is capable of displaying five-digit numbers.

In step S1213, the result of the calculation process in step S1212 is output to the role ratio monitor 77, and the display of each display section 77a to 77e on the role ratio monitor 77 is controlled so that a four-digit number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77. Specifically, a number smaller than 1 and up to four decimal places, such as "0.5012," is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77 as the ratio of the number of games in which a push order notification may occur out of the total number of games. After the process of step S1213 is executed, the first section display process is terminated.

Note that the display of the role ratio monitor 77 may be controlled after rounding off the 5th decimal place in the calculation process of step S1212. In addition, since the first display unit 77a of the role ratio monitor 77 basically displays "0", the first display unit 77a may not be included, or the first display unit 77a may be configured to always display "0" by printing or the like. It is also preferable to configure the first display unit 77a and the second display unit 77b to display a decimal point by printing or the like between them.

<Second Section Display Process>
Next, the second section display process will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 36. As already described, the second section display process is a process performed in step S416 of the reel control process, and is performed after medals are paid out (payout determination process) and the game state is changed based on the winning result (bonus state process, winning result response process) at the end of one game.

In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the advantageous zone flag is set. If it is not set, the second zone display process is terminated. If the advantageous zone flag is set, in step S1302, a process is executed to count the number of games in the advantageous zone. Specifically, a process is executed to add 1 to the advantageous zone game count AG. After executing the process in step S1302, in step S1303, a process is executed to update the advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY (MY counter) provided in the various counter area 106e.

In the MY update process of step S1303, provided that the result of the current game is not a replay win, the number of coins inserted (number of coins bet) is subtracted from the number of coins paid out, and the subtraction result is added to the number of coins increased or decreased in the favorable zone, MY, thereby updating the number of coins increased or decreased in the favorable zone.

After executing the MY update process in step S1303, in step S1304, a remaining game number management process is executed, and in the following step S1305, a remaining number management process is executed. The remaining game number management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous zone reaches the upper limit game number (1500 games) with the current remaining number of games based on the remaining number of games in the AT mode. In the remaining game number management process, for example, at the start of the AT mode, based on the advantageous zone game number AG and the remaining number of games in the AT mode, it is grasped whether or not the advantageous zone reaches the upper limit game number before the AT mode termination condition even if the AT mode is continued. Then, if it is such a situation, the first excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for identifying that situation. In addition, the remaining number management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous zone reaches the upper limit increase number (2400 sheets) with the current remaining number of games based on the remaining number of games in the AT mode. In the remaining payout number management process, for example, if the sum of the expected medal increase calculated from the number of remaining games in the AT mode and the current advantageous zone increase/decrease medal number MY exceeds the upper limit increase (2400 medals), the system determines whether the situation is such that the upper limit increase in the advantageous zone will be reached before the AT mode termination condition is met even if the AT mode is continued. If this is the case, a second excess flag is set in the various flags storage area 106d as a flag to identify the situation.

In the next step S1306, it is determined whether the number of games in the advantageous zone AG has reached the upper limit of 1500, or whether the number of increases or decreases in the advantageous zone MY has reached the upper limit of increases of 2400 or more. If either of these forced termination conditions is met, in step S1307, the number of games in the advantageous zone AG and the number of increases or decreases in the advantageous zone MY are cleared to 0. In the next step S1308, a process is performed to end the display of the eighth display segment N8 as a zone indicator. Then, in step S1309, a process is performed to initialize parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous zone, and then the second zone display process is terminated.

More specifically, the data initialization process of step S1309 is a process for resetting flags and counters set at the transition to the current favorable zone, and flags and counters set during the current favorable zone, to their initial values. For example, if the favorable zone flag, AT mode win flag, AT mode flag, CZ mode flag, etc. are not cleared and are set, these flags are cleared. Furthermore, if the favorable zone game count AG, the favorable zone increase/decrease number MY, the premonition counter for the premonition mode, the counter for the number of continued games in AT mode, CZ mode, etc. are greater than 0, these counters are all reset to 0. In other words, the initialization process initializes all variables or parameters that affect the performance related to the push order notification with respect to the favorable zone as a favorable state using the push order notification, and is a process for clearing the RAM for such variables or parameters.

If it is determined in step S1306 that the number of games in the favorable zone AG has not reached the upper limit, and the number of increases or decreases in the favorable zone MY has not reached the upper limit increase, the process proceeds to step S1310, where it is determined whether the AT mode has ended in this game by determining whether the AT mode end flag is set. If the AT mode has ended, the process proceeds to step S1307, and the processing for the end of the favorable zone in steps S1307 to S1309 is performed, and the second zone display processing is then terminated.

On the other hand, if the AT mode end flag is not set, step S1311 checks whether each AT mode flag is set to determine whether the vehicle is in AT mode. If the vehicle is not in AT mode, the second section display process is terminated.

On the other hand, if in the AT mode, in step S1312, it is determined whether the BB game counter is at a specific number. As described above, the BB game counter corresponds to the number of games in the first BB state or the second BB state, and when the BB game counter is at a specific number, it means that it is the specific number of games in the first BB state or the second BB state. More specifically, since the second section display process is executed after each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stops, in step S1312, it is determined whether it is the end of the specific number of games in the first BB state or the second BB state. In this embodiment, the specific number is set to 1, and in step S1312, it is determined whether the BB game counter is at 1, and it is determined whether it is the end of the first game in the first BB state or the second BB state.

If it is the end of the first game in the first BB state or the second BB state during the AT mode, the processing for the end of the advantageous period in steps S1307 to S1309 is performed, and then the second period display processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not the first BB state or the second BB state even during the AT mode, or if it is not the end of the first game even during the first BB state or the second BB state during the AT mode, for example, if it is the end of the second game, the second period display processing is terminated directly without proceeding to step S1307.

In other words, in this embodiment, the conditions for ending the advantageous zone are set to be the end of the upper limit game count (1500 games) and the upper limit increase (2400 coins), the end of the AT mode, and also the end of the first game when the first BB state or the second BB state is entered during the AT mode. In other words, if the first BB state or the second BB state is entered during the AT mode, the AT mode will end when the advantageous zone ends, even if there are games remaining.

As shown in FIG. 24, in this embodiment, even if the state is transitioned to the first BB state or the second BB state during the AT mode, the expected medal increase per game does not change. Moreover, as described above, when the state is transitioned to the first BB state or the second BB state during the AT mode, the AT mode ends with the advantageous zone in the first game of the BB state, regardless of the number of games remaining in the AT mode. Therefore, it is considered that transitioning to the first BB state or the second BB state during the AT mode may not be advantageous for the player. On the other hand, in this embodiment, a process is set up to be executed when transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, so that transitioning to the first BB state or the second BB state during the AT mode can be advantageous for the player.

<Processing when transitioning to favorable zone>
The advantageous zone transition processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 37. The advantageous zone transition processing is a processing executed in step S1206 in the first zone display processing, and is a processing executed when a game is started based on the operation of the start lever 41. More specifically, it is a processing executed when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won in the lottery result corresponding processing of the game that is started.

In step S1401, the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and it is determined whether the game to be started this time is in either the first BB state or the second BB state. If neither of the BB state flags is set, the process proceeds to step S1402, where a process is performed to set the ceiling game number of the favorable zone to which the player will be shifted this time.

That is, in step S1402, a lottery process for the ceiling game number is executed. In this lottery process for the ceiling game number, a ceiling game number table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a, and the current ceiling game number is determined by lottery based on the obtained ceiling game number table. As shown in FIG. 38, the ceiling game number table is set so that one ceiling game number is randomly determined between 100 games and 999 games, and game numbers that are likely to be selected in approximately 100 game units are set, such as 100 games, 200 games, 300 games, ... 999 games. In addition, in the ceiling game number table, the ceiling game number that is likely to be selected differs depending on the setting value, and it is set so that the higher the setting value (the higher the ball payout rate), the more likely it is that a shorter ceiling game number will be selected.

In the following step S1403, a process is executed in which a value corresponding to the ceiling game number selected in step S1402 is input to the ceiling counter. As already explained, the ceiling counter is decremented by one each time a game is played in the AT selection process, and when it reaches 0, a transition to the AT mode occurs without going through the AT mode transition lottery. After that, in step S1404, a process is executed in which a ceiling command including the information on the ceiling game number is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and the advantageous zone transition process is terminated.

When a transition to a favorable zone occurs during any BB state in step S1401, a determination is made in step S1405 as to whether the BB payout counter is a predetermined specific number. As already explained, the BB payout counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to grasp the number of medals paid out during the BB state, and is a counter used to determine whether or not to end the BB state. In this embodiment, a determination is made in step S1405 as to whether the BB payout counter is a specific number of "7". In other words, in step S1405, a determination is made as to whether or not the favorable zone transition processing has been executed in a situation in which the number of medals paid out in the BB state is seven. A case where the number is seven is when either the first small prize of the push order bell or the watermelon (second small prize, third small prize) is won only once in the BB state.

If the determination in step S1405 is positive and the BB payout counter is a specific number (7), then in step S1406, a transition time AT mode transition lottery process is executed. In this embodiment, in the advantageous zone transition process, an AT mode transition lottery is executed if the BB payout counter is a specific number. In other words, if the BB payout counter is not a specific number when transitioning to an advantageous zone, the AT mode transition lottery is not executed. The probability of winning the transition time AT mode transition lottery in step S1406 is arbitrary, but in this embodiment, it is set to have a uniform probability (for example, a probability of about 33%, regardless of the game lottery result or set value) of winning the AT mode transition.

In the following step S1407, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery in step S1403 has been won. If the BB payout counter is not a specific number in step S1405, or if it is determined in step S1407 that the AT mode transition lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to step S1402, where the ceiling number of games is set, and the processing at the time of transition to the advantageous zone is terminated.

On the other hand, if the BB payout counter is at a specific number and the transition time AT mode transition lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S1408, and processing is performed to start the AT mode. That is, in step S1408, an AT type determination process is executed. This AT type determination process is the same as the process in step S1009 (FIG. 34) described above. Then, in step S1409, 50 is input to the AT game counter, and in step S1410, a process is executed to set the AT start command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this advantageous zone transition processing is terminated.

That is, in this embodiment, when a transition to a favorable zone occurs during the BB state, a lottery for transition to the AT mode may be held using the value of the BB payout counter, and if the AT mode transition lottery is won, a transition to the AT mode occurs. As described above, in this embodiment, the favorable zone ends in the first game of the first BB state or the second BB state in the AT mode. Therefore, for example, if the first small win is achieved in the first game of the BB state, which is the end game of the favorable zone, and seven medals are paid out, and a transition to the favorable zone occurs in the next game, there is a probability of about 33% of transition to the AT mode, since the BB payout counter is a specific number (7). In the AT mode, a push order notification corresponding to the first small win occurs when the push order bell is won, so if a transition to any of the BB states occurs during the AT mode, there is a high possibility of transitioning to the favorable zone when the BB payout counter is a specific number, and it is possible to reset to the AT mode.

In other words, rather than ending the advantageous zone when the number of remaining games in the AT mode reaches 0, by deliberately setting up an advantageous zone when there are still remaining games in the AT mode, there is a possibility that the AT mode will be reset when re-entering the advantageous zone. In this embodiment, this type of configuration is used to realize the consecutive win feature of the AT mode.

<Performance setting process>
Next, the effect setting process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 39. The effect setting process is a process that is activated by the CPU 181 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 2 msec).

In the performance setting process, first in step S1501, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main control device 101. If a new command has been received, in step S1502, a process is executed to store the received command in RAM 183. A command storage area is provided in RAM 183, and this command storage area is configured as a ring buffer that can store multiple commands individually and can read out previously stored commands.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1501, or after the process of step S1502 is executed, in step S1503, it is judged whether or not the newly received command is a betting command. A betting command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on a betting operation being performed, such as a betting command set in step S206 of the normal process. If it is a betting command, in step S1504, a betting performance setting process is executed. In the betting performance setting process, processing is performed to control the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 so that a performance based on the current betting operation is performed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1503, or after the processing of step S1504 has been executed, in step S1505, it is judged whether or not the newly received command was a start command. A start command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41, and includes the lottery result command set in step S311 of the lottery processing, as well as a premonition command, an add-on command, and a push order notification command set in the lottery result response processing (Figure 25), and an AT start command and a ceiling command set in the first section display processing (Figure 35). If it is one of these start commands, in step S1506, a start performance setting process is executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1505, or after the processing of step S1506 is executed, in step S1507, it is judged whether or not the newly received command is a command at each stop operation. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and is a stop command command set in step S405 of the reel control processing (FIG. 20). If the stop command is a stop command at each stop operation, in step S1508, a process for setting the performance at each stop operation is executed. In the process for setting the performance at each stop operation, processing is performed to control the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 so that a performance based on the current stop operation is performed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1507, or after the processing of step S1508 is executed, in step S1509, it is judged whether or not the newly received command is an all stop command. An all stop command is a command output from the main control device 101 when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and includes the winning result command set in step S417 of the reel control processing (Figure 20), as well as the first AT command, second AT command, AT start command, AT end command, CZ start command, CZ end command, etc. set in the winning result corresponding processing (Figure 33). If it is one of these all stop commands, in step S1510, the all stop performance setting processing is executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1509, or after the processing of step S1510 has been executed, other processing is executed in step S1511, and then the effect setting processing is terminated. In step S1511, settings are made for effects based on commands from the main control device 101 other than when a bet is made, when the game is started, or when the game is stopped (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59), effects based on signals from sensors connected without going through the main control device 101 (such as an effect switch detection sensor), settings for error notification, etc.

The start-time performance setting process and the full stop performance setting process will be explained below. Note that the explanation of each performance setting process will be given with reference to the overview diagrams of the display performances in Figures 44 to 48.

<Start-time performance setting process>
The start-time performance setting process of step S1506 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1601, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is a push order role win, based on the received lottery result command. If the push order role wins, it is determined in step S1602 whether or not a push order notification command has been received. If a push order notification command has been received, in step S1603, the auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, etc. are controlled so that a push order notification performance corresponding to the first minor role win is performed.

If it is determined in step S1601 that the lottery result of the current game is not a push order role win, it is determined in step S1604 whether the lottery result of the current game is a specific role win. A specific role is a lottery result that is called a rare role that is unlikely to appear (is unlikely to win) as a lottery result of each game, and in this embodiment, chance eyes A to chance eyes C, cherries A to C, and watermelon are set as the specific roles. As shown in FIG. 28, in the AT mode transition lottery triggered by these lottery results, it is set to be more likely to be an AT mode transition win than a lottery result other than the specific role. If the lottery result of the current game is a specific role win, in step S1605, a specific role notification process is executed. In the specific role notification process, control is performed so that a specific role notification that the lottery result of the current game is one of the above specific roles is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. For example, as shown in FIG. 44(a), the special role notification is set up so that three exclamation mark characters are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in correspondence with the three stop switches 42 to 44. As described above, the probability of winning the AT mode transition varies depending on the type of special role, so there is a great deal of interest in the type of special role, and it is thought that when a special role notification is made as described above, an attempt will be made to determine which result has been won.

Here, among the specific roles, there is a difference between Cherry A and Cherry B and Cherry C in that if Cherry A and Cherry B win, the 9th replay win, which is a weak cherry replay, is possible, whereas if Cherry C wins, the 11th replay win, which is a strong cherry replay, is possible in addition to the 9th replay win, which is a weak cherry replay. However, there is a common point in that any of Cherries A to C can win the 10th replay win, which is a cherry spill replay. In other words, if the 9th or 10th replay win is established, any of Cherries A to C can win, and if the 11th replay win is established, it is confirmed that Cherry C has won, out of Cherries A to C. In this case, to determine whether the winning combination is Cherry A to Cherry C, the player must aim for the symbol corresponding to the 11th replay win, and if the symbol stops on a valid line, the player can determine that the winning combination is Cherry C. If the symbol does not make the valid line despite the player's aim, the player can determine that the winning combination is Cherry A or Cherry B. On the left reel 32L, the symbol corresponding to the 11th replay win is the "BAR" symbol. In other words, in this case, the player can determine whether the winning combination is Cherry C or not by aiming for at least the 9th "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L and performing a stop operation. In addition, if the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop the reel 32L at the timing when the 5th "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the middle row and the 8th "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the middle row, the "BAR" symbol can be stopped in the middle row of the left reel 32L.

On the other hand, if the "white 7", "white clam" and "cherry" symbols stop on an active line from the left, a first BB win is achieved, and if the "white 7", "white clam" and "BAR" symbols stop on an active line from the left, a first BB win is achieved, but if the stop switch 42 is operated to stop at a timing when the "white 7" symbol cannot be stopped on the active line (middle row) of the left reel 32L, a first or second BB win cannot be achieved. More specifically, if the stop switch 42 is operated to stop at a timing that avoids the timing when the 19th "white clam" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the middle row and the third "white 7" symbol reaches the middle row, a first or second BB win cannot be achieved.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are stopped at the timing required to determine the type of specific combination, the system is set up so that the first BB win or the second BB win cannot be achieved.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1602 or step S1604, or after the processing of step S1603 or step S1605 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1606. In step S1606, it is judged whether or not an AT flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The AT flag is a flag that allows the CPU 181 to know that the AT mode is in effect. If the AT mode is in effect, an AT performance setting process is executed in step S1607. The AT performance setting process will be described in detail later.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1606, or after the processing of step S1607 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1608. In step S1608, it is judged whether or not a ceiling command has been received as the current start command. If a ceiling command has been received and the game is a favorable zone transition game, in step S1609, a performance setting process is executed to execute a favorable zone start performance according to the ceiling game number on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. As the favorable zone start performance, as shown in Figures 45(a) to 45(c), a cut-in performance is set in which the face of the main character is displayed up close, and Figure 45(b) shows a cut-in performance in which the face of the main character is displayed normally, Figure 45(a) shows a cut-in performance in which the face of the main character is depressed, and Figure 45(b) shows a cut-in performance in which the face of the main character is fired up. In relation to the ceiling game number, the cut-in effect in FIG. 45(a) is set to be selected easily when the ceiling game number is relatively high, and the cut-in effect in FIG. 45(c) is set to be selected easily when the ceiling game number is relatively low. In other words, each of these advantageous zone start effects is a suggestion effect that suggests the current ceiling game number, and the advantageous zone start effect allows the player to predict the ceiling game number of the advantageous zone to which they have currently moved.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1608, or after the processing of step S1609 is executed, the BB effect setting processing is executed in step S1610. The BB effect setting processing will be described in detail later. Then, in step S1611, the setting processing of other start-time effects is executed, and the start-time effect setting processing is terminated. In step S1611, for example, the processing is performed to set the effects according to the game state to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64, to set effects that suggest the lottery results in response to the start of the game, and to turn off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted.

<Performance setting process when all stops>
Next, the all-stop effect setting process executed in step S1510 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 41. The all-stop effect setting process is a process for setting the effect to be executed when one game ends.

In step S1701, it is determined whether or not a CZ start command has been received. If a CZ start command has been received, in step S1702, a process is executed to set a CZ flag in the various flag storage area 183a. The CZ flag is a flag that allows the CPU 181 to know that it is in CZ mode, and in a game that is started in a situation where the CZ flag is set, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled to perform a CZ mode performance (step S1611). In the following step S1703, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that a CZ start performance is performed. In the CZ start performance, for example, text such as "Entering the Chance Zone!!" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 to notify the player that the game will transition to a state (CZ mode) in which it is easier to win the transition lottery to the AT mode.

If a CZ start command has not been received in step S1701, the process proceeds to step S1704 to determine whether a CZ end command has been received. If a CZ end command has been received, the process executes a process to clear the CZ flag in step S1705. Then, in step S1706, the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 are controlled so that a CZ end effect is performed. In the CZ end effect, for example, text such as "Chance Zone Ended!!" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 to notify the player that the CZ mode has ended without winning the lottery for transition to the AT mode.

If the CZ end command has not been received in step S1704, it is determined in step S1707 whether or not an AT start command has been received. As already explained, in this embodiment, the AT start command is output when the premonition mode ends in the winning result response processing on the main control device 101 side at the end of the game, and also when the transition AT mode transition lottery is won in the advantageous zone transition processing on the main control device 101 side at the start of the game. In this case, in step S1707, the command storage area of RAM 183 is referenced to check whether or not the AT start command has been received not only at the end of the current game (when all the buttons are stopped) but also at the start of the current game.

If it is determined in step S1707 that an AT start command has been received, in step S1708, the initial number of games (50 games) of the AT mode to be started this time is input to the display AT game counter. Then, in step S1709, the AT flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. As described above, the AT flag is a flag that allows the CPU 181 to know that the AT mode is in progress, and in a game that is started in a situation where the AT flag is set, the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 are controlled to display the effects for the AT mode (step S1611).

In the next step S1710, by determining whether the first AT command has been received, it is determined whether the AT mode to be started this time is the first AT mode. If it is the first AT mode, in step S1711, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the first AT start performance is performed. In contrast, if it is the second AT mode, in step S1712, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the second AT start performance is performed. In these first AT start performance and second AT start performance, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays text such as "AT START!!" to notify the player that the AT mode is starting. Then, by making the background and characters different between the first AT start performance and the second AT start performance, the player is notified so that they can distinguish which AT mode is to be started this time.

If an AT start command has not been received in step S1707, it is determined in step S1713 whether or not an AT end command has been received. If an AT end command has been received, a process to clear the AT flag is executed in step S1714, and then the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 are controlled so that an AT end effect is performed in step S1715. In the AT end effect, for example, text such as "AT END!!" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 to notify the player that the AT mode has ended. Note that in the AT end effect, it is advisable to also notify the number of medals paid out or the increase in the number of medals paid out in the AT mode that is currently ending, the number of games to be continued in the AT mode, etc.

If the AT end command is not received in step S1713, it is determined in step S1716 whether any BB start command has been received. If any BB start command has been received, it is determined in step S1717 whether the AT flag is set. If the AT flag is set and a BB is won during the AT mode, as described above, the advantageous zone ends in the next game (the first game in the BB state). In this case, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the first end notice performance is performed in step S1718. In the first end notice performance, for example, as shown in FIG. 47(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays text such as "If the next game is a bell, it's your chance!!" together with a specified character, and the BB payout counter used in the transition AT mode transition lottery process in the advantageous zone transition process reaches a specific number, thereby notifying the player that the AT mode may be reset.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1717, or after the process of step S1718 is executed, a process of setting a BB flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed in step S1718. The BB flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to know that it is in the BB mode. In a game that is started in a situation where the BB flag is set, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled to perform a performance for the BB state (step S1611). However, in this embodiment, even if the BB flag is set, if the CZ flag or the AT flag is also set, the performance corresponding to these CZ flags and AT flags is preferentially executed. In other words, if it is the CZ mode and the BB state, the performance for the CZ mode is performed, and if it is the AT mode and the BB state, the performance for the AT mode is performed. This is due to the fact that, as described above, there is no substantial difference in the expected number of medals to be increased in the BB state compared to the carryover state. In addition, to notify the occurrence of a BB win, a display such as "777 GET!!" may be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 as shown in FIG. 47(a).

If no BB start command has been received in step S1716, it is determined in step S1720 whether any BB end command has been received. If any BB end command has been received, the process of clearing the BB flag is executed in step S1721.

In step S1703, step S1706, step S1711, step S1712, step S1715, step S1719, or step S1722, other setting processes for the effects when all reels stop are performed, and then this setting process for the effects when all reels stop is terminated. In step S1722, for example, the upper lamp 63 is controlled to light up in a color corresponding to the winning combination, a sound effect corresponding to the payout amount of the winning combination is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64, and a sound effect corresponding to an automatic bet during a replay is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64.

<AT performance setting process>
Next, the AT effect setting process (step S1607) in the start-time effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1801, a process is executed to subtract 1 from the display AT game counter provided in the various counter area 183b. In this embodiment, the number of games remaining in the AT mode is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 as a remaining game number display (see FIG. 46), and the display AT game counter is a counter for displaying the remaining game number. The CPU 181 controls the auxiliary display unit 65 to update the remaining game number display each time the display AT game counter is updated.

After executing the process of step S1801, in step S1802, it is determined whether or not an add-on command has been received as the start command for this time. If an add-on command has been received, in step S1803, a later-add-on lottery process is executed. In the later-add-on lottery process, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to perform a so-called later-add-on performance, which is a game after the game in which the add-on lottery was won, for example, after the number of remaining games in the displayed AT mode becomes a predetermined number (one game remaining). The winning probability of the later-add-on lottery is arbitrary, but for example, the winning probability of the later-add-on lottery may be different depending on the lottery result of the game that triggered the winning of the add-on. For example, it may be easier to win the later-add-on lottery when the add-on is won with a non-specific role (normal lip A to normal lip C) than when the add-on is won with a specific role, or vice versa. In addition, the probability of winning the later-placed lottery may be different depending on the setting value set in the winning probability setting process, for example, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the later-placed lottery, or vice versa. Furthermore, the probability of winning the later-placed lottery may be different depending on the type of AT mode, for example, the second AT mode may be easier to win the later-placed lottery than the first AT mode, or vice versa.

After the subsequent addition lottery is performed in step S1803, it is determined in step S1804 whether or not the subsequent addition lottery has been won, and if not, in step S1805, the additional effect is set to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 in the current game. As an additional effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 44(b), a number corresponding to the number of additional games is displayed as "+10" on the auxiliary display unit 65. In addition, in the additional effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound such as "Kyukyukyukyukyueen!"). In the following step S1806, a process is performed to update the value of the above-mentioned display AT game counter so that a number corresponding to the current addition is added.

If it is determined in step S1804 that a later addition has been won, a process is executed to set a later addition flag in the various flag storage area 183a in step S1807. The later addition flag is a flag that allows the CPU 181 to know that a later addition performance should be performed when the number of remaining games in the displayed AT mode reaches a predetermined number, that is, that the later addition performance will be performed later. Then, in step S1808, a process is executed to add the current number of added games to the later addition counter provided in the various counter area 183b, and then this AT performance setting process is terminated. The later addition counter is a counter that allows the CPU 181 to know the number of games to be added as a later addition performance. In other words, the sum of the value of the later addition counter and the value of the display AT game counter corresponds to the actual number of remaining games in the AT mode, and is equal to the value of the AT game counter on the main control device 101 side.

If it is determined in step S1802 that the add-on command has not been received, in step S1809, it is determined whether the above-mentioned add-on flag is set. If the add-on flag is set, in step S1810, it is determined whether the add-on counter is a predetermined number of 100 or more. If the add-on counter is less than 100 and it is determined that less than 100 games will be added, in step S1811, it is determined whether the above-mentioned display AT game counter is a first predetermined number (11). If the display AT game counter is the first predetermined number, a process is performed in step S1812 to clear the add-on flag, and then the process proceeds to step S1805 to execute a process for performing the add-on performance. On the other hand, even if the add-on flag is set, if the add-on counter is 100 or more and it is determined that more than 100 games will be added, it proceeds to step S1813 to determine whether the display AT game counter is a second predetermined number (1) set to a value smaller than the first predetermined number. If the display AT game counter is at the second predetermined number, the process executes a process to clear the later-addition flag in step S1812, and then proceeds to step S1805 to execute a process to perform an additional-addition effect. If a negative judgment is made in step S1811 or step S1813, and the game is not one in which a later-addition effect should be performed, the AT effect setting process ends.

In other words, in this embodiment, the game in which the post-addition effect occurs varies depending on the number of games added during the post-addition effect, and the more games added, the more likely it is to be executed in a game with fewer games remaining in the AT mode.

After the display AT game counter is updated in step S1806, it is determined in step S1814 whether the later addition flag is not set and the later addition counter is greater than 0. The process of step S1814 is a process for determining whether the added performance set in step S1805 is based on the current added command or is a later addition performance. In other words, if the later addition flag is not set but the later addition counter is greater than 0, this means that the added performance has been performed as a later addition performance, and in this case, a process is executed in step S1815 to clear the later addition counter to 0. If a negative determination is made in step S1814 or after the process of step S1815 is executed, the AT performance setting process is terminated.

<BB performance setting process>
Next, the BB effect setting process carried out in step S1610 in the start-time effect setting process (FIG. 40) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S1901, it is determined whether the BB flag is set. If the BB flag is not set and the game to be started is a game in a carryover state or a normal game state that is not a BB state, it is determined in step S1902 whether the AT flag is set. If the AT flag is set, it is determined in step S1903 whether the display AT game counter is equal to or less than a third predetermined number. In this embodiment, the third predetermined number is set to 10, and it is determined in step S1903 whether the number of remaining games in the AT mode displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is equal to or less than 10 games. The third predetermined number is set to a number smaller than the first predetermined number (11) determined in step S1811 and larger than the second predetermined number (1) determined in step S1813.

If the remaining number of games displayed in the AT mode is 10 or less, step S1904 determines whether the later-addition flag is set. If the remaining number of games displayed in the AT mode is 10 or less but the later-addition flag is set, this means that an additional 100 games or more will be added as a later-addition effect. If the later-addition flag is not set, step S1905 determines whether the current state is a carryover state. If it is a carryover state, step S1906 determines whether the lottery result of this game is a result that can result in the carried-over BB winning.

As already explained, in the priority setting process (step S313) on the main control device 101 side, if the first BB or second BB overlaps with a replay or a small win, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop the replay or small win with priority. In other words, a result that can result in a BB win basically means that the lottery result for this game is a losing result.

If the result is not a loss, in step S1907, the winning BB should be awarded, and the lottery result of this game is a result that the BB cannot be awarded. In this embodiment, the winning probability of the notification lottery process is set to about one third. Then, in step S1908, it is determined whether the notification lottery has been won, and if the notification lottery has been won, in step S1909, the winning waiting effect is controlled to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64, and then the BB effect setting process is terminated. In the winning waiting effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 46(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays a text message such as "You've got a chance to win a bonus by the end and win a consecutive jackpot!!" together with a predetermined character, and the player is notified that the AT mode may be reset due to the re-transition of the advantageous zone by winning the bonus.

If the lottery result of the current game is such that the carried-over BB win can be achieved in step S1906, control is performed in step S1910 to display a winning instruction effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64, and then the BB effect setting process ends. In the winning instruction effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 46(b), a predetermined character is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 along with text such as "Go for it!!" and a display corresponding to the type of carried-over BB (the first BB notification in the figure) to notify the player that a BB win should be achieved.

In contrast, if the AT mode is not selected in step S1902, if the remaining number of games displayed in the AT mode is not equal to or less than the third predetermined number in step S1903, if the remaining number of games displayed is equal to or less than the third predetermined number in step S1904 but the later-play flag is set, if the normal game state is selected before the BB win in step S1905, or if it is determined that the notification lottery has not been won in step S1908, the BB effect setting process ends without performing the winning wait effect or winning instruction effect.

As already explained, in this embodiment, there is no substantial difference in the expected value of medal increase or decrease between the carryover state and the BB state, and furthermore, since winning the BB during the AT mode ends the AT mode regardless of the number of games remaining in the AT mode, there is basically no advantage to winning the BB state. Rather, if the BB is won when there are still many games remaining in the AT mode, even if the AT mode is reset, there may be cases where the number of games remaining in the AT mode before the reset is greater than the number of games remaining in the reset AT mode, which may be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, the notification that a BB should be won is made only when the number of games remaining in the AT mode is small (less than the third predetermined number), so that resetting the AT mode is not disadvantageous to the player.

In this embodiment, the probability of a losing result in each game during the carryover state is set to approximately 1 in 5.03. In other words, the number of remaining games in the AT mode, at which the winning waiting effect or winning instruction effect can occur, is set to a number of games sufficient to produce a lottery result that can result in a BB win (approximately twice the number of games that is the denominator of the probability). By doing this, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as a losing result not being obtained when trying to achieve a BB win at the end of the AT mode, and the AT mode ending without achieving a BB win.

As described above, when it is confirmed that a later-addition effect will occur (when the later-addition flag is set), the number of remaining games in the AT mode displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 differs from the actual number of remaining games in the AT mode. Also, when the number of games added during the later-addition effect is less than 100 games, the later-addition effect occurs in a game (11 games remaining) prior to the game (10 games remaining) in which the winning wait effect or winning instruction effect will be performed. This prevents a BB win from being achieved and the AT mode from ending even when there are still many games remaining in the AT mode.

In contrast, if the number of games added during the later addition effect is 100 or more, even if the game (10 games remaining) is one in which a winning wait effect or winning instruction effect will be performed, the winning wait effect or winning instruction effect will not occur. In other words, even if the remaining number of games displayed in the AT mode is equal to or less than the third predetermined number, the winning wait effect or winning instruction effect will not occur, making it possible to expect a later addition effect of 100 or more games to occur.

However, the winning waiting effect will not be executed unless the notification lottery is won, even if the later addition flag is not set. In other words, the winning waiting effect will not occur even if the remaining number of games displayed in the AT mode is 10 or less if there are later addition effects of 100 or more games waiting, or if the notification lottery has not been won.

Furthermore, because the winning indication effect is configured to be executed without the intervention of a notification lottery, it is possible to avoid missing a chance to reset the AT mode due to a BB winning not being achieved even when no subsequent bonus effect is pending. In other words, if the number of remaining games displayed in the AT mode is 10 games or less and the lottery result of the game is a losing result, and a winning indication effect occurs, it is determined that no subsequent bonus effect is pending. Conversely, if the number of remaining games displayed is 10 games or less and the lottery result is a losing result, but no winning indication effect occurs, it is determined that a subsequent bonus effect is pending. In this way, it is possible to dramatically increase the excitement of playing after the number of remaining games displayed in the AT mode is 10 games or less.

If the BB flag is set in step S1901 and it is in the BB state, proceed to step S1911. In step S1911, a process is executed to increment the BB game number counter provided in the various counter area 183b by 1. The BB game number counter is a counter that allows the CPU 181 to grasp the number of games in the BB state, and corresponds to the BB game counter on the main control device 101 side. In the following step S1912, it is determined whether the AT flag is set, and if the AT flag is set, it is determined in step S1913 whether the BB game number counter is 1. In other words, it is determined whether the game to be started this time is the first game in the BB state in the AT mode. If it is not in the AT mode, or if it is not the first game in the BB state even in the AT mode, the first process for this BB performance is terminated as it is.

As already explained, when a transition to the BB state occurs during the AT mode, the first end notice performance is performed as a performance when the game is stopped completely (step S1718, FIG. 47(a)). The case where a positive judgment is made in step S1913 is the start of the next game after the first end notice performance is performed. In this case, in step S1914, it is judged whether or not the lottery result of the current game is a push order bell win. If the push order bell wins, in step S1915, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the second end notice performance is performed, and then the first process for the BB performance is terminated. In the second end notice performance, for example, as shown in FIG. 47(b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays a text such as "Yay!!" together with a predetermined character to notify the player that the BB payout counter has been successfully set to a specific number (7). The second end notice performance is performed so as not to overlap with the push order notification performance, and is set so that the player can easily understand the push order corresponding to the first minor role even when the second end notice performance is being performed.

If the result of the lottery in step S1914 is negative and the result of the current game is not the push order bell, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled in step S1916 so that the third end notice performance is performed, and then the first process for the BB performance is terminated. In the third end notice performance, for example, as shown in FIG. 48(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays a text message such as "Don't give up yet!!" together with a predetermined character, and although the result of the lottery in this game is not the push order bell win, it is notified that there is still a chance to set the BB payout counter to a specific number (7). That is, in this embodiment, if the result of the lottery in the game is a watermelon win and the second or third small prize win can be achieved, seven medals are paid out, and in this case, the BB payout counter can be set to a specific number (FIG. 48(b)). Therefore, even if the lottery result of the first game in BB state is not a push order bell win, there is a chance to receive a lottery for transition to AT mode during the advantageous zone transition processing, and it is possible to maintain a sense of anticipation until the stop switches 42 to 44 are stopped.

In contrast, if the lottery result for this game is a losing result or any replay result is a winning result, the BB payout counter cannot be set to a specific number, and the player cannot receive the lottery for transition to the AT mode during the advantageous zone transition processing (Figure 48 (c)).

In this embodiment, as described above, the probability of winning the push order bell in the BB state is approximately 1 in 1.5, and the probability of winning the watermelon is approximately 1 in 219. If these lottery results are obtained, the BB payout counter reaches a specific number and the transition AT mode transition lottery is executed. Since the probability of winning the transition AT mode transition lottery is approximately 1 in 3, if a BB is won during the AT mode, there is an approximately 1 in 4.5 probability that the AT mode will be reset.

Incidentally, even when the push order bell is won, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated according to the push order notification, the 4th to 27th small prizes will be won instead of the 1st small prize, or a miss will occur, and the BB payout counter will be a number different from the specific number (0, 1). Also, even when the watermelon is won, if the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 does not allow either the 2nd or 3rd small prize to be won, resulting in a so-called miss, the BB payout counter will be a number different from the specific number (0). In these cases, the transition AT mode transition lottery is not held. This encourages more careful operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, making it possible to increase the fun of the game. In addition, by doing this, it is possible to avoid holding an AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition even when the player wants to end the AT mode, and it is possible to realize the consecutive win feature of the AT mode without eliminating the so-called thrill of slot machines, where the game starts and ends with the player's operation.

In addition, if a special role is won in the first game in BB state during AT mode, the execution of the special role notification effect (step S1605) may be restricted. By doing so, it becomes impossible or difficult to distinguish whether the game results in a loss or a special role before the operation of stop switches 42 to 44, and when the third end notice effect is performed, it is possible to enhance the effect of maintaining the anticipation of winning the watermelon.

<Relationship between AT mode transition lottery and BB payout counter at transition time>
The relationship between the AT mode transition lottery at transition time and the BB payout counter in this embodiment will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

For example, if a transition to a favorable zone occurs at time t1, when the player is not in the BB state, the processing at the time of transition to the favorable zone does not execute a lottery for transition to AT mode at the time of transition, and sets the ceiling number of games. If a transition to any of the BB states occurs at time t2, before the transition to the AT mode, the processing to end the favorable zone is not executed at time t3, which is the first game in the BB state. Also, since the player is not in the AT mode, the push order notification effect does not occur, and even if the push order bell is won during the BB state, the first small prize will not be won unless the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 happens to match the first small prize winning.

The BB state ends when the number of medals paid out during the BB state reaches or exceeds a predetermined number. The BB payout counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to know that the conditions for ending the BB state are met, and when medals are paid out during the BB state, such as at timing t4, the number of medals paid out is added to the BB payout counter. Then, at timing t5 when the BB payout counter reaches or exceeds a predetermined number (71), the BB state ends.

In addition, a transition to the AT mode occurs in the favorable zone at the timing of t6, and if the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes 0 at the timing of t7 or the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number of the favorable zone is reached, the favorable zone ends with the end of the AT mode. In the normal zone, a favorable zone transition lottery is executed, and a transition to the favorable zone occurs when the transition lottery is won. The favorable zone transition lottery is executed for lottery results other than the common bell, and the winning probability is 100%, so a transition to the favorable zone occurs in a relatively small number of games. For example, if a transition to the favorable zone occurs at the timing of t8, since the BB state is not in effect at that time, the transition AT mode transition lottery process is not executed as at the timing of t1, and the ceiling number of games is set.

Let us say that a transition to the AT mode occurs at time t9, and a transition to the BB state occurs at time t10 when there are only a few games remaining in the AT mode. In this case, the advantageous zone ends at time t11, which is the end of the first game in the BB state, and the AT mode also ends. For example, if the lottery result of the first game in the BB state is a push order bell win, a push order notification effect will occur because it is before the end of the AT mode, and it will be possible to achieve the first small prize. Then, when the advantageous zone ends at time t11, the BB payout counter will be 7.

The BB payout counter is special information that is not subject to initialization processing at the end of the favorable zone, and is maintained even at the timing of t12 when a re-transition to the favorable zone occurs. Then, when favorable zone transition processing is performed at the timing of t12, it is a favorable zone transition during the BB state, and since the BB payout counter is 7, a specific number, a transition time AT mode transition lottery is executed and there is about a one-third probability of transitioning to the AT mode. Then, at the timing of t13 when the BB payout counter reaches 71, the BB state ends. At the end of the BB state, initialization processing of the BB payout counter is performed, and at the timing of t13, the BB payout counter becomes the initial value of 0.

As described above, this embodiment provides the following excellent advantages:

The BB payout counter, which is updated according to the progress of the game in the first BB state or the second BB state, is configured to be used for the advantageous zone transition process, so it is possible to associate the gameplay of transitioning to the BB state based on a BB win with the game of transitioning to an advantageous zone where a push order notification can be generated based on a favorable zone transition win. In this way, the gameplay of the BB state and the advantageous zone, which progress in parallel, is associated, increasing the interest of the game.

The BB payout counter is updated according to the results of each game in the bonus state processing, regardless of whether or not there is a transition to a favorable zone. More specifically, the BB payout counter is updated according to the results of each game, whether it is a game in which favorable zone transition processing is performed, a game in an favorable zone, or a game in a normal zone. The BB payout counter is not subject to the initialization processing of favorable zone information at the end of the favorable zone. By using such a counter, it is possible to associate a game that proceeds in parallel with an advantageous zone regardless of the advantageous zone with the advantageous zone, and it is also possible, for example, to carry over information on a game in a normal zone to an advantageous zone, or to carry over information on a game in one advantageous zone to a subsequent advantageous zone.

By configuring the advantageous zone to end in the first game of the BB state, which is the game before the game in which the BB state ends, if the advantageous zone transition lottery is won during the BB state, a re-transition to the advantageous zone will occur in the BB state. By doing this, it is possible to associate one advantageous zone with a subsequent advantageous zone by using a counter that is updated in one BB state.

In this embodiment, the advantageous zone ends in the first game of the BB state that is transitioned to during the AT mode. In this way, it is possible to make it easier for the BB payout counter to become a specific number when the advantageous zone ends. In other words, if the push order bell is won in the first game of the BB state that is transitioned to during the AT mode, a push order notification corresponding to the first small win occurs because the first game of the BB state is in AT mode. Therefore, when the advantageous zone ends in the first game of the BB state, the BB payout counter becomes a specific number of 7. In this way, it is possible to associate multiple advantageous zones with a novel configuration in which the push order notification is used to make the BB payout counter a specific number, and the BB payout counter is used in the next advantageous zone transition process.

If the BB payout counter is 7, a lottery for transition to the AT mode is executed during the advantageous zone transition process, and if the lottery is won, the mode is reset to AT mode. In other words, even if the BB payout counter is 7, the mode is not necessarily reset to AT mode. By configuring the counter to be reset through the lottery for transition to the AT mode, it is possible to ensure sound play without increasing the chance of consecutive wins in the AT mode too much.

When the advantageous zone ends in the first game of the BB state that was transitioned to during AT mode, if the lottery result of that game is not a push order bell win, but a win in one of the replay results or a miss, the advantageous zone ends without the BB payout counter reaching a specific number. In this case, the lottery for transitioning to AT mode at the time of transition is not held at the next advantageous zone transition process. By doing this, it is possible to attract great interest in the lottery result of the first game of the BB state when transitioning to the BB state during AT mode.

Even if the first game in BB state is a push order bell win and a push order notification occurs, it is permitted to play in a way that does not follow the push order notification and does not allow the first small win to be achieved. Also, even if the first game in BB state is a watermelon win, it is permitted to play in a way that does not allow either the second or third small win corresponding to the watermelon to be achieved and thus misses out. This configuration encourages careful operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the first game in BB state, improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, if a transition to the BB state does not occur when the AT mode ends, the advantageous zone ends when the AT mode ends, and the AT mode transition lottery at the time of the next transition to the advantageous zone is not executed. In other words, in a game in which the advantageous zone is ended based on the player's operation as described above, and the AT mode is reset when the advantageous zone transition occurs based on the player's operation, the configuration allows the player to freely end the advantageous zone and reset the AT mode at their own will. In this way, it is possible to realize a gameplay in which the advantageous zone is ended and reset as described above, without compromising the thrill of a slot machine, in which the game is started based on the player's operation and ended based on the player's operation.

In addition, even if you try to transition to the BB state at the end of the AT mode, you cannot transition to the BB state unless you get a losing result that allows for a BB win. Therefore, depending on the lottery results of each game at the end of the AT mode, the AT mode may end without transitioning to the BB state. By doing this, it is possible to improve the playability of the AT mode at the end.

<Modification 1>
In this modified example, the condition for executing the AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition is different from that in the first embodiment. First, with reference to Fig. 50, the relationship between the winning mode and the awarded benefit in this modified example and the changes in the lottery table will be described.

As shown in FIG. 50(a), in this modified example, the bonus given when the second small win is achieved and the bonus given when the third small win is achieved are different from those in the first embodiment. That is, in this modified example, when the second small win is achieved, five medals are paid out, and when the third small win is achieved, three medals are paid out. Also, as shown in FIG. 50(b), in this modified example, the corresponding role when the watermelon is won is different, and when the index value IV=23 is won, only the second small win can be achieved, and the third small win cannot be achieved. In return, a winning role of index value IV=26 is set, and when the index value IV=26 is won, the third small win can be achieved. It is set so that the index value IV=23 is easier to win than the index value IV=26, and the second small win is easier to achieve than the third small win.

The processing performed when transitioning to the favorable zone in this modified example will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 51.

The process of setting the ceiling game number in steps S2001 to S2003 is the same as the process in steps S1402 to S1404. In this modified example, first, in step S2004, a process of acquiring a transition AT mode transition lottery table from the various table storage area 105a is executed. The transition AT mode transition lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the transition AT mode transition lottery varies depending on the value of the BB payout counter, as shown in FIG. 50(c). Specifically, when the BB payout counter is 7, there is a 20% probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery, when the BB payout counter is 5, there is a 50% probability of winning the AT mode transition, and when the BB payout counter is 3, there is an 80% probability of winning the AT mode transition.

When the BB payout counter is 7, as described above, it means that the lottery result of the first game in the BB state is the first small win, when the BB payout counter is 5 it means that the second small win is achieved, and when the BB payout counter is 3 it means that the third small win is achieved. In other words, the harder it is to win the result of the first game in the BB state, the easier it is to win the AT mode transition lottery.

In addition, in the transition AT mode lottery table in this modified example, the BB payout counter is also set to an initial value of 0. If the BB payout counter is 0, the AT mode transition lottery is not won. In other words, if the first game in the BB state is a miss or a replay, the transition AT mode lottery is not won.

After acquiring the AT mode transition lottery table in step S2004, a process for grasping the BB payout counter is executed in step S2005, and a lottery process for transition to AT mode is executed in step S2006. Then, in step S2007, it is determined whether or not the AT mode transition has been won, and if so, the process for starting the AT mode is executed in steps S2008 to S2010, and the process for transition to the favorable zone is terminated. On the other hand, if the AT mode transition has not been won, the process proceeds to step S2001, the ceiling number of games is set, and the process for transition to the favorable zone is terminated.

Here, in the favorable zone transition processing in this modified example, the process (step S1401) for determining whether or not the transition to the favorable zone has occurred during the BB state is not set, and the transition AT mode transition lottery (step S2006) is executed regardless of whether or not the state is the BB state. As described above, in this modified example, the transition AT mode transition lottery is executed using the transition AT mode transition lottery table, and the transition AT mode transition lottery table is set so that the AT mode transition is not won when the BB payout counter is at the initial value (0). Since the BB payout counter is set to the initial value when the BB state ends, the BB payout counter is always at the initial value except in the BB state. Therefore, if a transition to the favorable zone occurs in a state other than the BB state, the transition AT mode transition lottery is executed, but the AT mode transition is not won. In this way, the favorable zone transition processing has a common processing configuration regardless of the state at the time of the favorable zone transition, and the processing configuration of the favorable zone transition processing can be simplified.

In other words, the BB payout counter is used to execute the transition AT mode transition lottery as a process related to the instruction function, and if the BB payout counter is a specific number of 7, the transition AT mode transition lottery can be won, and the BB payout counter can be updated to the specific number of 7 in the BB state, but is not updated to the specific number of 7 in states other than the BB state. In this way, in order to win the transition AT mode transition lottery, it is necessary to hold the transition AT mode transition lottery during the BB state, making it possible to favorably increase the superiority of the BB state.

The BB payout counter is not updated when a small prize such as the push order bell is won in the normal game state or the carryover state other than the BB state, but the probability of winning the push order bell and the bonus (number of medals) awarded when a prize is won are the same in the BB state, normal game state, and carryover state. This configuration makes it possible to increase the advantage of the BB state in a completely different way from conventional configurations that increase the advantage of the BB state by increasing the probability of winning a small prize or the bonus awarded, which can greatly contribute to the realization of innovative gameplay.

The BB payout counter is configured to be updated by any small win, and when the BB payout counter reaches the upper payout limit (71) due to a small win, the BB state ends. In this way, the content of the game that sets the BB payout counter to a specific number and the game that ends the BB state are standardized, making it possible to appropriately increase attention to games that result in a small win during the BB state.

By configuring the advantageous period to end regardless of whether the BB payout counter has been updated to a specific number in the first game in the BB state, it is possible to draw great interest in whether the BB payout counter has been updated to a specific number at the end of the advantageous period. This makes it possible to ideally increase attention to the game at the end of the advantageous period.

In this modified example, game results with different payout amounts are provided, and the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery table varies depending on the value of the BB payout counter, making it possible to attract greater interest in the game results of the first game in the BB state. This makes it possible to significantly improve the playability of the AT mode transition lottery using the BB payout counter.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, the timing of execution of the advantageous zone transition process is changed. FIG 52 is a flowchart showing the zone display first process in this modification.

In this modified example, if it is determined in step S2101 that the zone indicator is not being displayed, it is determined in step S2102 whether or not the advantageous zone winning game flag is set. If the advantageous zone winning game flag is set, the advantageous zone flag is set in step S2102, and processing to start measuring the advantageous zone game number AG is executed in step S2103. Then, display of the zone indicator is started in step S2104. In other words, in this modified example, processing at the time of transition to the advantageous zone is not performed in the advantageous zone transition game.

On the other hand, in this modified example, if it is determined in step S2101 that the zone display is being displayed, it is determined in step S2106 whether or not the advantageous zone winning game flag is set, and if it is set, a process is executed in step S2107 to clear the advantageous zone winning game flag. Then, in step S2108, a process at the time of transition to the advantageous zone is executed.

The processing at the time of transition to the favorable zone in this modified example is the same as the processing at the time of transition to the favorable zone in modified example 1 above (Figure 51). However, in the transition AT mode transition lottery table in this modified example, the value of the BB payout counter is set to the value of two games in the BB state, as shown in Figure 53. In other words, the cases where the value of the BB payout counter is 7, 8, and 14 are set.

As described above, the advantageous zone ends in the first game in the BB state during the AT mode, and if the push order bell is won in the first game in the BB state, the first small prize is won, the BB payout counter becomes 7, and the advantageous zone ends. Then, even if the advantageous zone flag is set in the next game, there is a case where the push order notification does not occur in that game, and even if the push order bell is won, the first small prize cannot be won. In other words, when the BB payout counter is 7, it means that the first small win is achieved in the first game in the BB state where the advantageous zone ends, and the second game in the BB state where the advantageous zone flag is set is a miss, a win as a replay result, or a winning small win is missed. When the BB payout counter is 8, it means that the first small win is achieved in the first game in the BB state, but the first small win is not achieved when the push order bell is won in the second game in the BB state, and the fourth to 27th small wins are achieved. When the BB payout counter is 14, it means that the first small win is successfully achieved in the first and second games in the BB state.

In the AT mode transition lottery table in this modified example, if the BB payout counter is 7 or 8 and the first small win is achieved at least in the game where the favorable zone ends, there is a 30% probability of winning the AT mode transition, and if the BB payout counter is 14 and the first small win is achieved not only in the game where the favorable zone ends but also in the next game, there is a 60% probability of winning the AT mode transition, which is higher than when the BB payout counter is 7 or 8.

If the determination in step S2106 is negative, or after the processing in step S2108 is executed, the display continuation processing of the section display is performed in step S2109. The processing in steps S2109 to S2114 is the same as the processing in steps S1208 to S1213 described above.

In other words, in this modified example, the advantageous zone transition processing is configured to be executed at the start of the game following the game that transitioned to the advantageous zone. In other words, the advantageous zone transition processing is executed at the start of the first game after the game has transitioned to the advantageous zone.

As described above, the slot machine 10 is configured such that the advantageous zone flag can be set in the game following the game that ends the advantageous zone. If the game that ends the advantageous zone is considered to be a game in the advantageous zone, and the game in which the advantageous zone flag is set is also considered to be a game in the advantageous zone, there may be cases where there is no game in the normal zone between the advantageous zone and the advantageous zone. If the game in which the advantageous zone flag is set is considered to be a game in the normal zone, the advantageous zone transition processing would be executed in a game in the normal zone, and the significance of distinguishing between the advantageous zone, which is a zone in which a push order notification as an instruction function can occur and processing related to the instruction function can be executed, and the normal zone, which is a zone in which a push order notification as an instruction function does not occur and processing related to the instruction function is not executed, may be lost.

In this regard, by configuring the processing at the time of transition to an advantageous zone to be executed in the game following the game in which the advantageous zone flag is set, as in the above modified example, even if the game in which the advantageous zone flag is set is the normal zone, the processing at the time of transition to an advantageous zone is executed during the advantageous zone, and it is possible to appropriately execute the processing at the time of transition to an advantageous zone while preserving the significance of distinguishing between advantageous zones and normal zones.

In the processing at the time of transition to the advantageous zone, a process may be executed to set the ceiling number of games in the advantageous zone to be transitioned to. If the ceiling number of games is determined during the normal zone, this determined ceiling number of games will result in an advantage/disadvantage in the normal zone, which is undesirable. In this regard, the present modified example is configured so that the ceiling number of games is set after a more reliable transition to the advantageous zone, making it possible to prevent situations in which there is an advantage/disadvantage in the normal zone from occurring.

In addition, in the advantageous zone transition process, a transition-time AT mode transition lottery can be executed to determine whether or not the advantageous zone to be transitioned to will be transitioned to as AT mode. If it were decided during the normal zone that the advantageous zone would start as AT mode, this would create advantages/disadvantages in the normal zone, which is undesirable. In this regard, this modified example is configured to transition to the AT mode after more reliably transitioning to the advantageous zone, making it possible to prevent situations in which there are advantages/disadvantages in the normal zone from occurring.

By configuring the system to perform advantageous zone transition processing at the start of the next game after the advantageous zone flag is set, the system is configured to execute advantageous zone transition processing reliably after transition to the advantageous zone and as quickly as possible after transition to the advantageous zone, making it possible to minimize situations where advantageous zone transition processing is not performed despite a transition to an advantageous zone.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, the advantageous zone transition process is performed in the game in which the advantageous zone flag is set, but is configured to be performed at the end of the game. Figure 54 is a flowchart showing the zone display first process in this modified example, and Figure 55 is a flowchart showing the zone display second process in this modified example.

As shown in FIG. 54, in the first interval display process in this modified example, if it is determined in step S2201 that the interval indicator is not being displayed, it is determined in step S2202 whether or not the advantageous interval winning game flag is set. If the advantageous interval winning game flag is set, the advantageous interval flag is set in step S2203, measurement start processing of the advantageous interval game number AG is executed in step S2204, and display start processing of the interval indicator is executed in step S2205. Also, if the interval indicator is being displayed in step S2201, display continuation processing is executed in step S2206. The processing in steps S2207 to S2211 is the same as the processing in steps S1209 to S1213.

In other words, in this modified example, the advantageous zone transition process is not performed in the first zone display process that is executed at the start of the game.

In contrast, as shown in FIG. 55, in the second zone display process in this modified example, if the advantageous zone flag is set in step S2301, it is determined in step S2302 whether the advantageous zone winning game flag is set. If the advantageous zone winning game flag is set and the advantageous zone flag was set at the start of the currently ending game, the process proceeds to step S2303, the advantageous zone winning game flag is cleared, and then advantageous zone transition processing is executed in step S2304. The advantageous zone transition processing in step S2304 is the same as the advantageous zone transition processing in modified example 2 above, and the transition AT mode transition lottery table is also the same as the table in modified example 2 (FIG. 53).

If a negative judgment is made in step S2302, or after the processing of step S2304 is executed, various processes during the favorable zone are executed in steps S2305 to S2315. The processes of steps S2305 to S2315 are the same as the processes of steps S1302 to S1312 described above.

By doing this, if a game that starts when the advantageous zone flag is set is considered to be an advantageous zone, and a game that starts when the advantageous zone flag is not set is considered to be a normal zone, it is possible to configure the system so that advantageous zone transition processing is performed by the time the game is started when the advantageous zone flag is set.

<Modification 4>
In this modified example, the probability of winning the lottery for the transition to the AT mode varies depending on the type of BB state when the advantageous zone transition process is executed. Figure 56 is a flowchart showing the advantageous zone transition process in this modified example.

In this modified example, compared to the processing at the time of transition to the favorable zone in modified example 1 above, the processing in steps S2401 to S2405 and steps S2407 to S2411 is the same as the processing in steps S2001 to S2010 above, but differs in that after the BB payout counter is grasped in step S2405, a confirmation process is executed for each BB status flag in step S2406.

Figure 57 (a) shows the transition time AT mode transition lottery table in this modified example. In this modified example, if the BB payout counter is a specific number of 7, there is a predetermined probability that the AT mode transition will be won, and if it is any other value, the AT mode transition will not be won. And, when the BB payout counter is 7, if the BB state is the first BB state, there is a 20% probability that the AT mode transition will be won, and if the BB state is the second BB state, there is a 50% probability that the AT mode transition will be won in the transition time AT mode transition lottery, so that the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery in the second BB state is higher than that in the first BB state.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the BB state is set so that there is no substantial difference in the degree of advantage compared to the carry-over state, and it is basically assumed that the game will be played in the carry-over state regardless of whether or not there is a transition to the AT mode. However, as mentioned above, from the viewpoint of advantageously resetting the AT mode, it is more advantageous for the player to proceed through the AT mode with the second BB win carried over than to proceed through the AT mode with the first BB win carried over.

Since a player may suffer a disadvantage if a BB win occurs after a transition to the AT mode occurs and before the AT mode needs to be reset, the main cases in which the AT mode can proceed with a second BB win carried over are when the AT mode is reset during the BB state and the second BB win occurs after the BB state ends, or when the second BB win is carried over from before the transition to the AT mode occurs.

In other words, if a BB is won at the end of the AT mode, resetting the AT mode, and the BB state ends during the AT mode, it becomes possible to vary the probability of resetting the AT mode depending on the type of BB that is subsequently won, providing new excitement during the AT mode.

Also, before the transition to AT mode, it is possible to grasp the type of BB that has been won by performing a stop operation aiming for a BB win in a game that has a losing result. In other words, if a stop operation is performed aiming for a 1st BB win and the 1st BB win is achieved, the 1st BB win has been carried over, and if the 1st BB win is not achieved, either the 2nd BB win has been carried over or the game is in the normal game state before the BB win. Since the 1st BB win and the 2nd BB win cannot be won at the same time, if the 1st BB win has been carried over, it is preferable for the player to allow the 1st BB win and end the 1st BB state early, in order to have another chance to win the 2nd BB.

Here, when the first BB state is completed in AT mode, the first small prize winning with a payout of 7 coins occurs with a probability of about 1 in 1.5, so it is possible to end the first BB state in about 15 games. In contrast, when the first BB state is completed in non-AT mode, the first small prize winning with a payout of 7 coins occurs with a probability of about 1 in 9, and the fourth to 27th small prize winning with a payout of 1 coin occurs with a probability of about 1 in 2.4, so it is possible to end the first BB state in about 55 games, and it will take more games to end the first BB state compared to AT mode.

In this way, if it is found that the first BB win has been carried over before the transition to the AT mode, the first BB state is ended as soon as possible after the transition to the first BB state, and the second BB win is carried over, so that it is possible to add interest to the game before the transition to the AT mode. In this case, as described above, no matter which BB win is carried over, there is no difference in the advantage in each game before the transition to the AT mode, and no matter which BB state is in, there is no difference in the advantage in each game before the transition to the AT mode compared to the carryover state. Therefore, while preventing differences in the advantage in each game before the transition to the AT mode, it is possible to create differences in the advantage after the transition to the AT mode, and while differences in the advantage occur and focus the player's attention on the AT mode, it is possible to maintain the player's interest even in places where there are no differences in the advantage.

Moreover, when the first BB state is consumed before the transition to the AT mode, it is possible to play a game in which the player relies on their own intuition to achieve the first small win when the push order bell is won, in order to end the first BB state as soon as possible. In this way, the benefit of achieving the first small win when the push order bell is won can be obtained in ways other than the increase in the number of medals held, and it is possible to further improve the playability before the transition to the AT mode.

In the AT type determination process (step S2409) of the favorable zone transition process, the selection rate of the AT mode may be varied depending on the type of BB state. FIG. 57(b) is a diagram showing an example of an AT type lottery table. In FIG. 57(b), when the favorable zone transition process is performed during the first BB state, the second AT mode is more likely to be selected than the first AT mode, and when the favorable zone transition process is performed during the second BB state, the first AT mode is more likely to be selected than the second AT mode.

As described above, the second AT mode is set to have a higher probability of winning the additional lottery than the first AT mode, and the second AT mode can be said to be a more advantageous AT mode for the player than the first AT mode. In other words, in this example, the second AT mode is more likely to be selected in the AT type determination process in the first BB state than in the second BB state, and in terms of the type of AT mode selected, the first BB state is more advantageous for the player.

And because the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is higher in the second BB state than in the first BB state, when the favorable zone transition processing is performed in the first BB state, it is unlikely that the AT mode transition will be won, but the second AT mode is likely to be selected, and when the favorable zone transition processing is performed in the second BB state, it is likely that the AT mode transition will be won, but the second AT mode is unlikely to be selected. In this way, it is possible to provide characteristics for the AT mode depending on the type of BB state in which the favorable zone transition processing is performed. In this way, for example, a player who wants to aim for the second AT mode even if it is unlikely that the AT mode transition will be won will want to win the first BB, making it possible to meet the diverse needs of players.

<Modification 5>
In this modified example, the occurrence rate of the push order notification in the first game in the BB state varies depending on the number of games remaining in the AT mode. Fig. 58 is a flowchart showing the lottery result response process in this modified example.

In this modified example, when the push order bell is won (step S2509: YES) and any of the AT mode flags are set (step S2510: YES), the subsequent processing differs from the lottery result response processing in the first embodiment described above, and the other processing (steps S2501 to S2508) is the same as the corresponding processing in the first embodiment (steps S601 to S608).

In other words, in this modified example, if the push order bell is won during the AT mode, in step S2511, it is determined whether any of the BB state flags are set. If they are set, in step S2512, it is determined whether the BB game counter is 0. As already explained, the BB game counter is a counter that is incremented by one in the bonus state processing, and the bonus state processing is a process that is performed at the end of the game (step S414). In contrast, the lottery result corresponding processing is a process that is performed at the start of the game (step S310). In other words, in step S2512, if the BB state flag is set and the BB game counter is 0, this means that it is the start of the first game in the BB state, and that the advantageous period in that game has ended.

If it is the first game in BB state in AT mode, in step S2513, the notification lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a, and in step S2514, the notification lottery process is executed. Then, in step S2515, it is determined whether or not the notification has been won, and if it has been won, in step S2516, a push order notification corresponding to the first minor role is issued, and in step S2517, a process is executed to set the push order notification command, and then the lottery result response process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S2511 or step S2512, the process proceeds to step S2516 without going through the notification lottery, and a process for notifying the push order is executed.

In the notification lottery table in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 59, the probability of winning the notification varies depending on the value of the AT game counter, and the smaller the value of the AT game counter, the easier it is to win the notification. For example, if the number of remaining games in the AT mode is 5 to 9, the probability of winning the notification is 80%, if it is 2 to 4, the probability of winning the notification is 90%, and if it is 1, the probability of winning the notification is 100%. In other words, even if the number of remaining games in the AT mode is 10 games and a winning waiting effect or a winning instruction effect occurs, it is easier to generate a push order notification in the first game in the BB state by delaying the BB winning as much as possible, and it is easier to successfully reset the AT mode. However, since a BB winning is possible in a game that results in a miss, if the BB winning is delayed too long, the AT mode may end without winning the BB winning. This configuration makes it possible to provide thrilling gaming experiences in which the timing of a BB win is decided based on the relationship between the reset rate of the AT mode and the number of games remaining until the end of the AT mode.

In addition, in the notification lottery table of this modified example, the higher the value of the AT game counter, the easier it is to win the notification. For example, if the number of games in the AT mode is equal to or greater than the initial number of games (50 games), the probability of winning the notification is 50%. This makes it possible to provide relief in the event that a BB win is unintentionally achieved in a situation where there are still many games remaining in the AT mode, such as in the early stages of the AT mode.

<Modification 6>
In this modified example, if it is known in advance that the advantageous zone will end when the upper limit game number or the upper limit increase number is reached, the occurrence rate of the push order notification for the first game in the BB state is configured to be different. Figure 60 is a flowchart showing the remaining game number management process, and Figure 61 is a flowchart showing the remaining number management process. These remaining game number management processes and remaining number management processes are processes (steps S1304 and S1305) performed in the second zone display process (Figure 36).

In the remaining game number management process, in step S2601, the number of games in the favorable zone AG is checked to determine the number of games since the transition to the favorable zone. In the following step S2602, the AT game counter is checked to determine the remaining number of games in the AT mode (G1). In the following step S2603, the remaining number of games (G2) of modes already scheduled during the favorable zone, such as the remaining number of games in the CZ mode or the remaining number of games in a specialized zone, is determined. Then, in step S2604, the number of games in the favorable zone AG, the remaining number of games in the AT mode (G1), and the remaining number of other games (G2) are added together to calculate the scheduled end number of games (GS) of the favorable zone.

In step S2605, it is determined whether the planned number of games to be completed (GS) calculated in step S2604 is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone (1500). If it is equal to or greater than 1500, it is determined in step S2606 whether the first excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The first excess flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone will be reached without playing all the remaining games even if the AT mode or the like is executed as is. If the first excess flag is not set, the first excess flag is set in step S2607, and a process is executed in step S2608 to set the first excess command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this remaining game number management process is terminated. The first excess command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to know that the first excess flag has been set. If a negative judgment is made in step S2605 or an affirmative judgment is made in step S2606, the remaining game number management process is terminated as is.

In the remaining number management process, as shown in FIG. 61, first, in step S2701, a process is executed to grasp the advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY. In the following step S2702, a process is executed to calculate the increase in the number of medals (expected increase, M1) that can be expected in the remaining number of games in the AT mode (G1) grasped in the above step S2602 from the increase in the number of medals that can be expected per game in the AT mode (net increase). In step S2703, a process is executed to calculate the increase in the number of medals (expected increase, M2) that can be expected in the remaining number of games (G2) of other games grasped in the above step S2603 from the increase in the number of medals (net increase) that can be expected per game in other games. Then, in step S2704, a process is executed to calculate the expected increase/decrease number (MS) by adding the advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY, the expected increase in the AT mode (M1), and the expected increase in the other games (M2).

In step S2705, it is determined whether the expected increase or decrease (MS) calculated in step S2704 is equal to or greater than the upper limit increase (2400) of the advantageous zone. If it is equal to or greater than 2400, it is determined in step S2706 whether the second excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The second excess flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that even if the AT mode or the like is executed as is, it is highly likely that the upper limit increase of the advantageous zone will be reached without playing all the remaining games. If the second excess flag is not set, the second excess flag is set in step S2707, and a process is executed in step S2708 to set the second excess command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this remaining number management process is terminated. The second excess command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to know that the second excess flag has been set. If a negative judgment is made in step S2705 or an affirmative judgment is made in step S2706, the remaining number management process is terminated as is.

In this modified example, as in modified example 5 above, if the push order bell is won in the first game in the BB state during the AT mode, a push order notification is executed through a notification lottery. In the notification lottery table in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 62, the probability of winning the notification is set to differ depending on the presence or absence of the first excess flag and the second excess flag. Specifically, if neither excess flag is set, the notification is won with a 50% probability, whereas if both excess flags are set, the notification is won with a 10% probability. In a situation where the upper limit is likely to be reached in terms of both the number of games and the number of medals, the occurrence rate of the push order notification in the first game in the BB state is low. In this way, it is possible to reduce the likelihood of consecutive wins and ensure the significance of setting an upper limit on the advantageous zone.

In contrast, when the first excess flag is set but the second excess flag is not set, there is an 80% probability of winning the notification, and the push order notification for the first game in the BB state is more likely to occur than when neither excess flag is set. When the first excess flag is set but the second excess flag is not set, it is a case where it is predicted that the upper limit number of games will be reached but the upper limit increase will not be reached, for example, when it takes many games from the transition to the advantageous zone to the transition to the AT mode, and there is a possibility that not many medals have been won at the time of the forced end of the advantageous zone. Therefore, by setting the occurrence rate of the push order notification for the first game in the BB state high as described above, the reset rate of the AT mode can be increased, and the player's sense of loss can be effectively compensated.

On the other hand, if the first excess flag is not set but the second excess flag is set, there is a 5% probability of a winning notification, making the push order notification for the first game in BB state less likely to occur than when neither excess flag is set. When the first excess flag is not set but the second excess flag is set, it is predicted that the upper limit increase will be reached before the upper limit number of games is reached, and there is a high possibility that a rapid increase in medals is occurring. Therefore, as described above, by lowering the re-setting rate of the AT mode, the medal increase speed can be slowed down, making it possible to ensure the soundness of the game.

<Modification 7>
In this modified example, in the advantageous zone transition process, information regarding the number of games played from when the BB is won until the BB is won is used as special information for the process related to the instruction function. Figure 63 is a flowchart showing the bonus state process in this modified example.

In step S2801, it is determined whether or not it is in any of the BB states, and in step S2802, it is determined whether or not it is in the carry-over state. If it is in the carry-over state, in step S2803, it is determined whether or not a BB win has been achieved in the current game, and if a BB win has been achieved, processing is executed in steps S2804 to S2806 to transition to the BB state. The processing in these steps S2801 to S2806 is the same as the processing in steps S501 to S506 above. However, in this modified example, if it is determined in step S2803 that a BB win has not been achieved, processing is executed in step S2807 to increment the RT game counter provided in the various counter area 106e by 1, and then this bonus state processing is terminated. The RT game counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of games played from the BB win to the BB prize, and is a type of special information that is updated according to the progress of the game from the BB win, which allows for a transition to the BB state as a special state, to the end of the BB state.

In addition, in the bonus state processing, if it is in any of the BB states in step S2801, the BB game counter is incremented by 1 in step S2808, and it is determined in step S2809 whether or not a small winning combination has been achieved. If a small winning combination has been achieved, the payout amount is incremented to the BB payout counter in step S2810, and it is determined in step S2811 whether or not the BB end condition has been achieved. If the BB end condition has been achieved, a process is executed in step S2812 to clear the RT game counter to 0 as the initial value. Then, in steps S2813 to S2816, other processes for ending the bonus are executed, and then the bonus state processing is terminated. The processes in steps S2808 to S2811 and steps S2813 to S2816 are the same as the processes in steps S507 to S514 above.

In other words, in this modified example, the number of games played from the BB win to the BB prize is counted as the RT game counter. The RT game counter is initialized when the BB state ends, and the number of games played during the BB state until the transition to the BB state can be counted as the RT game counter.

Note that in a carryover state where a BB win is carried over, the system may be configured to be set to an RT state in which the probability of winning any of the replays increases. In this case, the RT game counter can be said to be a counter that counts the number of games in the RT state as a carryover state. In this case, an upper limit may be set on the number of games in the RT state, and for example, the system may be configured to set the RT state to an upper limit of 200 games as a predetermined number of games, and when the upper limit of the predetermined number of games is reached, the RT state may end and the probability of winning a replay may return to the same probability as in the normal play state.

A portion of the lottery table for the normal game state in this modified example is shown in Figure 64 (a). In this modified example, the 1st BB win or the 2nd BB win is set up so that in addition to overlapping wins with the first replay at index values IV = 25, 26, the 1st BB or the 2nd BB can also be won alone at index values IV = 27, 28. In other words, in this modified example, it is possible to achieve a 1st BB win or a 2nd BB win in a game in which the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won.

The processing at the time of the transition to the favorable zone in this modified example is the same as the processing at the time of the transition to the favorable zone in modified example 1 (FIG. 51). However, in the transition AT mode transition lottery table in this modified example, the probability of winning the transition AT mode transition lottery is set using the RT game counter in addition to the value of the BB payout counter. Specifically, when the BB payout counter is 7, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is set to 5% when the RT game counter is 1 to 99, 30% when it is 100 to 999, 50% when it is 1000 to 1499, and 100% when it is 1500 or more, and the higher the value of the RT game counter, the easier it is to win the AT mode transition. Also, when the BB payout counter is a value other than 7, the RT game counter is set to not win the AT mode transition if it is any value other than 0.

In other words, the more games required from winning the BB until the situation where the BB winning should occur is set to be higher, the higher the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition. The situation where the BB winning should occur is the situation at the end of the AT mode, and the situation where a large number of games is required until such a situation occurs is when the AT mode continues for a long time, or when a large number of games are required until the AT mode transition. Therefore, as described above, by making it easier to win the AT mode transition the larger the value of the RT game counter, it is possible to improve playability by linking advantageous degrees, in that the longer the AT mode continues, the easier the AT mode is to be reset, while making it possible to remedy a stuck situation where a large number of games is required until the AT mode transition by the AT mode reset rate.

As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to challenge the AT mode to be reset by winning the BB at the end of the AT mode, but it is also possible that the AT mode will end without winning the BB, for example, if the game lottery result is not a winning result even at the end of the AT mode. In this regard, as described above, the higher the RT game counter, the higher the AT mode reset rate, making it possible to rescue players who are stuck in not being able to challenge the AT mode to be reset. In this way, it is possible to rescue players in a different dimension from the ceiling counter, which rescues players who are stuck in not being able to transition to the AT mode. Therefore, it is possible to use this rescue to encourage continued play.

The RT game counter is not subject to initialization processing at the end of a favorable zone, and even if a favorable zone ends without a single BB win during that zone, the RT game counter is not reset. Therefore, the RT game counter may become greater than the upper limit of the number of games in the favorable zone. In this regard, in this modified example, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition is set assuming that the RT game counter is greater than the upper limit of the number of games in the favorable zone (100% probability of winning). In other words, relief from a stuck state where it is not possible to challenge resetting the AT mode is effective even for a stuck state that spans a favorable zone, and can also relieve a stuck state that exceeds the upper limit of the number of games in the favorable zone. This makes it possible to follow up on a stuck state that has lasted for a longer period of time, and suppress a decline in the player's desire to play.

In addition, in this modified example, if the RT game counter is 0 and a BB win is successfully achieved in the BB winning game, the AT mode transition is set to be won with a high probability (100% probability) regardless of the value of the BB payout counter. A case where a BB win is achieved in a BB winning game and the advantageous zone transition processing is performed during the BB state is mainly a case where the AT mode is successfully reset using the BB state transition and the BB state ends during the reset AT mode. In other words, if a BB win can be achieved again in the BB winning game after the BB state ends in the reset AT mode, the AT mode is reset. On the other hand, if a BB win cannot be achieved in the BB winning game, the BB win is carried over and the AT mode progresses.

In other words, as described above, it takes about 15 games to end the BB state during the AT mode, but once the AT mode is reset, as shown in FIG. 64(c), the AT mode in the BB state will be repeated for about 15 games until the BB winning game fails to establish a BB win. Even if the BB winning game fails to establish a BB win, it is possible to continue the AT mode until the number of games in the AT mode at the time of resetting is exhausted, and furthermore, it is possible to establish a BB win again at the end of the AT mode and challenge the resetting of the AT mode. In this way, it is possible to realize the consecutive win nature of the AT mode across the advantageous zone, and it is possible to appropriately improve the interest of the game.

In this case, the winning modes of the first BB and the second BB are set so that the first BB and the second BB cannot be won at the same time, so if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in an attempt to win the first BB, the second BB cannot be won, and if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in an attempt to win the second BB, the first BB cannot be won. With this configuration, it becomes more difficult to win a BB in a BB winning game, and it becomes possible to realize a gameplay in which the AT mode can be continued for the duration of the BB state as long as the player correctly guesses which BB has been won and does not make a mistake in the operation.

When playing the above game, it is preferable that the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, etc. make it difficult or impossible for the player to distinguish which BB has been won. Specifically, it is preferable to have the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, etc. perform the same performance regardless of which BB has been won. In addition, in order to realize a game that allows the player to determine the winning game of the first BB or the second BB, it is preferable to configure the device to perform a suggestive performance that suggests the game in which the first BB or the second BB has been won, for example, to perform a notification for the winning game with a predetermined probability in the winning game of the first BB or the second BB. In this case, the notification for the winning game may be the same as the specific role notification performance in FIG. 44(a), or may be a different performance. If the BB winning game is configured to perform an effect similar to the special role notification effect, as described above, the operation mode of the stop switches 42-44 that allows the type of special role to be determined cannot result in the first BB win or the second BB win, so it is possible to play a game in which the player can choose between operating in an operation mode that results in the first BB win or the second BB win, or operating in an operation mode that determines the type of special role.

Here, the favorable zone transition process in this modified example is the same as the favorable zone transition process in modified example 1, and a lottery for transition to AT mode is performed regardless of whether the favorable zone transition process is performed during the BB state. In other words, regardless of whether the transition to the favorable zone occurs during the BB state or not, if the RT game counter is 0, it is possible to transition to the AT mode. Then, for example, after the setting value is changed by the winning probability setting process, each BB winning flag and favorable zone flag are cleared, and in the normal game state and game play is started from the normal zone, if the transition to the favorable zone is successful before the BB win, it is possible to transition to the AT mode. Therefore, it is possible to expect a chance to attract customers early in the morning at the game hall.

Note that although the winning probability setting process clears the advantageous zone flag, each BB winning flag may not be cleared, and when clearing the advantageous zone flag, it may be possible to select whether or not to clear each BB winning flag. By using such a configuration, it is also possible to prevent the early morning from being too advantageous.

<Modification 8>
In this modified example, as in the above modified example 3, the advantageous zone transition processing is performed at the end of the game in which the advantageous zone flag is set, and the advantageous zone ends in the game in which the BB win is achieved during the AT mode. Figure 65 is a flowchart showing the second zone display processing in this modified example.

In this modified example, similar to steps S2301 to S2312 above, steps S2901 to S2912 execute processes for updating various information during the favorable zone and for processing to end the favorable zone based on the establishment of the forced termination condition. Also, similar to the first embodiment above, if it is determined in step S2913 that the forced termination condition is not established, it is determined in step S2914 whether the AT mode termination flag is set, and if it is set, the process proceeds to step S2910 and processing to end the favorable zone is executed.

If the AT mode end flag is not set in step S2913, it is determined in step S2914 whether any of the AT mode flags are set, and if they are set and the game is in AT mode, it is determined in step S2915 whether any of the BB state flags are set. If the game is in AT mode and in BB state, the process proceeds to step S2916, where it is determined whether the BB game counter is 0. If the BB state flag is set and the BB game counter is 0, this means that the game has resulted in a BB win. In this case, the process proceeds to step S2910, where processing for the end of the advantageous period is executed. If a negative determination is made in any of steps S2914 to S2916, the second period display processing is terminated.

In other words, in this modified example, if a BB win is achieved during the AT mode, the advantageous zone and AT mode end in the game in which the win was achieved. In that case, if a transition to the advantageous zone occurs in the first game of the BB state, the first game of the BB state will not generate a push order notification, so even if the push order bell is won, the first minor win cannot be achieved unless the 1 in 6 operation sequence is correct, and the BB payout counter will not reach the specific number of 7. In this way, it is possible to set the difficulty of resetting the AT mode high, making it possible to increase attention to the first game of the BB state.

<Modification 9>
In this modified example, the BB game counter is used as special information in the advantageous zone transition processing. As already explained, the BB game counter is a counter for grasping the number of games in the BB state. Also, in this modified example, the advantageous zone transition lottery table used in the advantageous zone transition lottery is different from that in the first embodiment. Figure 66 is a diagram showing the advantageous zone transition lottery table in this modified example.

In this modified example, regardless of the lottery result that triggers the advantageous zone transition lottery, it is set so that there is a 30% probability of winning the transition. In other words, even if the game lottery result in the normal zone is the lottery result that triggers the advantageous zone transition lottery, there are cases where there is no transition to the advantageous zone. More specifically, for example, when the push order bell is won, there is a 30% chance of transition to the advantageous zone. In that case, if the advantageous zone and AT mode end in the first game in BB state during AT mode, as in the first embodiment, there will be no transition to the advantageous zone even if the push order bell is won in the next game.

The processing at the time of the transition to the favorable zone in this modified example is the same as the processing at the time of the transition to the favorable zone in modified example 1 (FIG. 51). However, in the transition AT mode transition lottery table in this modified example, the probability of winning the transition AT mode transition lottery is set according to the BB game counter, not the value of the BB payout counter. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67, in the transition AT mode transition lottery table in this modified example, the BB game counter is set to 0 or 1, and the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is set to be lower as the value of the BB game counter increases, such as 80% for 2, 20% for 3, and 10% for 4. On the other hand, the BB game counter is set to 20% for 5, 30% for 6, 40% for 7, 50% for 8, 80% for 9, and 100% for 10 or more, and the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is set to be higher as the value of the BB game counter increases, such as 5 or more.

In other words, the configuration is such that the AT mode transition is more likely to occur if the re-transition to the advantageous zone can be made as soon as possible after the advantageous zone ends in the first game in the BB state, or if the re-transition to the advantageous zone can be delayed as long as possible. By doing this, it is possible to provide an intense sense of excitement in the game from when the advantageous zone ends until the re-transition occurs when resetting the AT mode.

The above modified example clarifies that the BB game counter, which is special information used in the processing at the time of transition to the advantageous zone, is also updated according to the progress of the game during the normal zone. By configuring such parameters as special information and using them in the processing related to the instruction function, it becomes possible to reflect the information of the game progressing in the advantageous zone regardless of whether it is in the advantageous zone or not. This can be very useful in diversifying the game.

Second Embodiment
In this embodiment, an example will be described in which a configuration in which special information such as a BB payout counter is used in the processing at the time of transition to a favorable zone is applied to a game in which the favorable zone ends before transition to the AT mode. In order to realize such gameplay, first, in this embodiment, the end condition of the favorable zone is changed from that of the first embodiment. Figure 68 is a flowchart showing the second processing of zone display in this modified example.

Steps S3001 to S3009 are similar to the above-mentioned steps S1301 to S1309, and involve updating various information during the favorable zone, and executing processing for terminating the favorable zone based on the establishment of the forced termination condition. Also, if it is determined in step S3006 that the forced termination condition is not established, it is determined in step S3010 whether the AT mode termination flag is set, and if it is set, the process proceeds to step S3007 and executes processing for terminating the favorable zone, which is also similar to the above-mentioned first embodiment.

In this embodiment, if the AT mode end flag is not set in step S3010, it is determined in step S3011 whether the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3012, and it is determined whether the BB game counter is 1. If it is the first game in the BB state in the CZ mode, it is determined in step S3013 whether the BB payout counter is 7 as a specific number, and if it is 7, it proceeds to step S3007, on the condition that a specific flag is not set in the various flag storage area 106d in step S3014, and after executing the processing for the end of the advantageous zone, the second processing for displaying this zone is terminated. Also, if the BB payout counter is not 7 in step S3013, a process for setting a specific flag is executed in step S3015. Then, in step S3016, a process for setting a specific command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and the second processing for displaying this zone is terminated. The specific command is a command that causes the display control device 81 to understand that a specific flag has been set.

The specific flag is cleared during the initialization process (step S3009) when the favorable zone ends.

In other words, in this embodiment, a transition to the BB state occurs during the CZ mode, and if seven medals are paid out in the first game in the BB state, the advantageous period ends, and if seven medals are not paid out, the advantageous period does not end. Also, even if seven medals are paid out, the advantageous period does not end if seven medals were not paid out before that.

The processing at the time of transition to the favorable zone in this embodiment is the same as the processing at the time of transition to the favorable zone in variant 1 of the first embodiment described above (Figure 51). However, in the transition AT mode transition lottery table in this embodiment, when the value of the BB payout counter is 7, there is a 100% probability that the AT mode transition will also be won, and when the value is any other than this, the AT mode transition will not be won. And, as described above, when the transition AT mode transition lottery is not won, the ceiling game number setting processing is performed.

As already explained, CZ mode is a mode in which the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is high, and is a mode to which one can transition mainly when a specific role is won and the AT mode transition lottery is not won. In this embodiment, if a BB win is achieved during CZ mode, the advantageous zone will end and it will be possible to transition to the AT mode when a re-transition to the advantageous zone occurs, provided that seven medals are paid out in the first game of the BB state (for example, the first minor role win is successfully achieved when the push order bell is won). In this way, it is possible to significantly improve the playability during CZ mode.

However, in one advantageous zone, there is only one chance to end the advantageous zone by winning the BB, and once a BB is won during CZ mode, if seven medals are not paid out in the first game of that BB state, a specific flag is set, and thereafter, even if a BB is won during CZ mode and seven medals are paid out in the first game of that BB state, the advantageous zone will not end. By doing this, it is possible to more limit the chances of ending the advantageous zone and causing a transition to the AT mode, making it possible to prevent the player from becoming too advantageous, and thereby significantly increasing the attention paid to the first game of the BB state that has been transitioned to during CZ mode.

Next, we will explain the changes to the full stop effect setting process in this embodiment with reference to the flowchart in Figure 69.

In this embodiment, if it is determined in step S1713 that the AT end command has not been received, then in step S3101 it is determined whether or not the specific command has been received. If a specific command has been received, then in step S3102, a process is executed to set a specific flag in the various flags storage area 183a. The specific flag corresponds to the specific flag on the main control device 101 side, and is a flag that allows the CPU 181 to understand that a transition to the BB state has already occurred during the CZ mode in the current favorable zone. The specific flag is cleared when the favorable zone ends (not shown).

If it is determined in step S3101 that a specific command has not been received, it is determined in step S3103 whether any BB start command has been received. If any BB start command has been received, it is determined in step S3104 whether the CZ flag has been set. If the CZ flag has been set and a transition to the BB state has occurred during CZ mode, it is determined in step S3105 whether the above-mentioned specified flag has been set.

If the specified flag is not set and the BB state during the CZ mode that is to start this time is the first in the current favorable zone, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the first end notice performance (Figure 47 (a)) is performed in step S3106. If the BB win is not during the CZ mode in step S3104, if the specified flag is set in step S3105, or after the processing of step S3106 is executed, the processing of setting the BB flag is executed in step S3107. Then, proceed to step S1722. Also, if no BB start command has been received in step S3103, proceed to step S1720.

Next, the BB performance setting process in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 70 (a).

In step S3201, it is determined whether the above-mentioned identified flag is set. If the identified flag is set, the BB effect setting process is terminated. If the identified flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S3202, where it is determined whether the BB flag is set. If the BB flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S3203, where it is determined whether the CZ flag is set.

If the CZ flag is set and the game is in CZ mode, step S3204 determines whether or not the game is in a BB carryover state. If the game is in a BB carryover state, step S3205 determines whether or not the lottery result of this game is a losing result that can result in a BB win. If the lottery result is not a losing result, step S3206 controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 so that a winning waiting effect is performed, and then ends the BB effect setting process. In the winning waiting effect of this embodiment, for example, in FIG. 46(a), the text display portion may be changed to a display such as "It's your chance to win a bonus and get an AT by the end!!" and applied. In this embodiment, the number of games remaining in the CZ mode may be displayed as the remaining game number display (FIG. 46(a)).

If, in step S3205, the lottery result for this game is a losing result and a BB win is possible, in step S3207, the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 are controlled to perform a win indication effect (Figure 46 (b)), and then this BB effect setting process is terminated.

If it is not in CZ mode in step S3203, or if it is not in a carryover state in step S3204, the BB effect setting process ends without performing the winning wait effect or winning instruction effect.

If the BB flag is set in step S3202, the process proceeds to step S3208. In step S3208, a process of incrementing the BB game number counter by 1 is executed. Then, in step S3209, it is determined whether the CZ flag is set, and if the CZ flag is set, it is determined whether the BB game number counter is 1 in step S3210. If it is the first game in the BB state that has been entered into the CZ mode, it is determined in step S3211 whether the lottery result of this game is a push order bell win. If the push order bell win is a win, in step S3212, a process of setting the second end notice performance is executed. In this embodiment, the second end notice performance notifies the win of the push order bell by displaying a character such as "Chance!!" together with a predetermined character as shown in FIG. 70(b), but does not notify the operation sequence corresponding to the first small prize win, and for example, displays three question mark characters lined up.

If the push order bell is not a winning combination in step S3211, the process proceeds to step S3213, where the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 are controlled to perform the third end notice performance, and then the BB performance setting process is terminated.

Next, the flow of the game in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the timing chart in Figure 71.

If a transition to the BB state occurs at t22, when the game is neither in CZ mode nor AT mode, in the favorable zone entered at t21, the favorable zone will not end at t23, which is the first game in the BB state. Therefore, at t24, which is the next game, the processing at the time of the transition to the favorable zone will not be executed, and there will be no transition to AT mode. The BB state entered at t22 ends at t25, when the condition for ending the BB state (payout of 71 or more coins) is met.

If a transition to CZ mode occurs at time t26, a winning wait effect or a winning instruction effect may occur as described above. If a BB win is achieved at time t27, the first end notice effect will occur in that game, and if the first minor win is successfully achieved in the next game (first game in BB state), a notification will be issued that a transition to AT mode will occur.

If the first minor win is achieved at time t28, which is the first game in the BB state, seven medals are paid out, the BB payout counter becomes 7, and the advantageous zone ends. Then, for example, if a transition to the advantageous zone occurs in the next game (t29), the advantageous zone transition process is executed, and since the BB payout counter is 7 in the transition AT mode transition lottery process, the AT mode transition is won and processing to start the AT mode is carried out. The BB state that was transitioned to at time t27 then ends at time t30.

In contrast, if a BB win is achieved at t32 in the CZ mode entered at t31, and the push order bell is won at t33, which is the first game in the BB state, but the first minor win is not achieved, for example, one medal will be paid out and the BB payout counter will become 1. In this case, the advantageous zone will not end and a specific flag will be set. Therefore, at t34, which is the next game, the advantageous zone transition process will not be executed and there will be no transition to the AT mode.

The BB state entered at t32 ends at t35 when the BB end condition is met. If the CZ mode is entered again at t36 during this favorable period, a BB win occurs at t37, and the first minor win occurs at t38, the first game in the BB state. In this case, seven medals are paid out, and the BB payout counter becomes 7. However, since the specific flag is set as described above, the favorable period does not end. Therefore, at t39, which is the game following the game, the favorable period transition process is not executed, and no transition to the AT mode occurs. The BB state entered at t37 ends at t40 when the BB end condition is met.

As described above, this embodiment provides the following excellent advantages:

In a configuration in which a BB payout counter is used as special information to perform processing at the time of transition to a favorable zone, the BB payout counter is used to perform processing for the end of the favorable zone. In other words, if the BB payout counter for the first game in the BB state is a specific number of 7, the favorable zone is ended and the BB payout counter is used to perform processing at the time of transition to a favorable zone. In contrast, if the BB payout counter for the first game in the BB state is a number other than the specific number, the favorable zone is not ended, and as a result, the BB payout counter is not used to perform processing at the time of transition to a favorable zone. In this way, by using one special information (BB payout counter) to perform processing at the end of the favorable zone and processing at the time of transition to the next favorable zone, it is possible to easily associate one favorable zone with the next favorable zone.

In other words, in the first embodiment, the special information (BB game counter) used for the end processing of the advantageous zone and the special information (BB payout counter) used for the transition processing of the advantageous zone were configured to be different. As a result, when the special information for the end is updated until the advantageous zone ends (BB game counter = 1), the special information for the transition processing may be updated to a predetermined special information (BB payout counter = 7) or to other special information (BB payout counter = 0, 1), and this is used to create diversity in the results of the transition processing of the advantageous zone. In contrast, as in this embodiment, by sharing the special information used for the end processing of the advantageous zone and the special information used for the transition processing of the advantageous zone, it is possible to uniformize the special information when the transition processing is performed, and for example, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the occurrence of an event such as not transitioning to AT mode even though the advantageous zone has ended.

If a transition to the BB state occurs based on the player's operation and the player succeeds in paying out 7 coins in the first game of the BB state based on the player's operation, the advantageous zone ends, and if a transition to the BB state occurs but 7 coins are not paid out in the first game of the BB state, the advantageous zone does not end. By doing this, the difficulty of ending the advantageous zone is increased, and it is possible to ensure a balance with the advantageous degree of the AT mode that is set when the advantageous zone is re-transitioned.

Furthermore, if seven coins are not paid out in the first game in the BB state, a specific flag is set, and while the specific flag is set, the advantageous zone will not end even if seven coins are paid out in the first game in the BB state. In this way, by limiting the chances to end the advantageous zone, more interest is drawn to the first game in the BB state, and more careful operation is encouraged, making it possible to improve the playability of the first game.

In this embodiment, by causing a transition to the BB state during the CZ mode, it is possible to end the advantageous zone on the condition that a specific flag is not set, but unless a transition to the CZ mode occurs, the advantageous zone cannot be ended even if a transition to the BB state occurs. In this way, the transition to the AT mode based on the transition to the BB state can be treated as a sub-treatment of the AT mode transition lottery during normal times, and it is possible to add gameplay that uses the BB state to transition to the AT mode, without eliminating the conventional gameplay, such as winning the AT mode transition lottery executed based on the lottery results of each game, or transitioning to the CZ mode, which is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery.

<Modification 1>
In this modification, the processing configuration is different in order to limit the chance of ending an advantageous zone in the first game of the BB state during one advantageous zone to one. Fig. 72 is a flowchart showing the bonus state processing in this modification.

The processing of steps S3301 to S3306 is the same as the processing of steps S501 to S506 described above. If it is determined in step S3301 that it is one of the BB states, then in step S3307 it is determined whether or not the specific flag described above is set. If the specific flag is not set and the current BB state is the first BB state in the current favorable period, then in step S3308, a process is executed to increment the specific BB game counter provided in the various counter area 106e by 1. The specific BB game counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games in the first BB state in one favorable period. On the other hand, if the specific flag is set in step S3307, then in step S3309, a process is executed to increment the BB game counter by 1.

After executing the processing of step S3308 or step S3309, the process proceeds to step S3310. The processing of steps S3310 to S3316 is the same as the processing of steps S508 to S514 described above. However, in step S3313, a process is executed to clear the current BB game counter to the initial value (0). That is, if the specific BB game counter was counting the number of BB games in the BB state that is currently ending, the specific BB game counter is cleared to the initial value, and if the BB game counter was counting the number of BB games in the BB state that is currently ending, the BB game counter is cleared to the initial value.

Figure 73 is a flowchart showing the second section display process in this modified example.

In this modified example, if it is determined in step S3410 that the AT mode end flag is not set, it is determined in step S3411 whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is set, it is determined in step S3412 whether or not the specific BB game counter is 1. If the specific BB game counter is 1, it is determined in step S3413 whether or not the BB payout counter is 7. If the BB payout counter is 7, the process proceeds to step S3407, and processing for the end of the advantageous period is executed. If the specific BB game counter is 1 but the BB payout counter is not 7, processing is executed in step S3414 to set a specific flag, and processing is executed in step S3415 to set a specific command, and then this period display second processing is terminated.

If the CZ mode flag is not set in step S3411, or if the specific BB game counter is not 1 in step S3412, the second section display process ends. Note that the processes in steps S3401 to S3409 are the same as those in steps S3001 to S3009 above.

In this way, in a configuration in which the BB game counter is used as a parameter in the BB state in the process for ending the advantageous zone, the BB game counter used in the BB state is configured to differ depending on the number of BB states in the advantageous zone. This means that when performing the process for ending the advantageous zone, it is no longer necessary to determine whether the current BB state is the (first) BB state in the advantageous zone (determine whether a specific flag is set). This simplifies the processing configuration.

In other words, by configuring the determination of whether or not it is the first BB state in the advantageous zone to be performed in the bonus state processing carried out during the BB state, it is possible to achieve overwhelming simplification of the processing compared to a configuration in which the determination of whether or not it is the first BB state described above is made in the second zone display processing carried out every game.

Specifically, when processing to end the advantageous zone is performed, a determination is made as to whether or not the specific BB game counter is 1, and this specific BB game counter is used only in the first BB state of the advantageous zone and is not used in any subsequent BB states, so that the specific BB game counter is 1 only in the first BB state of the advantageous zone and is not 1 in any subsequent BB states. In this way, it is possible to configure a configuration in which processing to end the advantageous zone can be performed only in the first game of the first BB state of the advantageous zone.

In particular, in this modified example, the BB payout counter for determining whether the end condition is met in the BB state is configured to use a common BB payout counter regardless of whether it is the first BB state in the favorable period, and the BB game counter for identifying the timing to end the favorable period is configured to differ depending on whether it is the first BB state in the favorable period. By doing so, the processing configuration of the bonus state processing is simplified, and it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as the BB state never ending or ending immediately due to a processing error, etc.

The specific BB game counter is then initialized when the BB state ends. By doing this, the specific BB game counter will be set to 1 only in the first BB state of the advantageous zone, and in subsequent BB states the specific BB game counter will not be set to 1 but will remain at its initial value (0).

The specific flag that allows the CPU 102 to determine whether or not it is the first BB state of the favorable zone is cleared by the initialization process of the favorable zone information that is executed at the end of the favorable zone. By doing this, it becomes possible to use the specific BB game counter again in the first BB state of the next favorable zone.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, in the first BB state in one advantageous period, a specific BB payout counter different from a normal BB payout counter is used to count the payout number during the BB state. Figure 74 is a flowchart showing the bonus state process in this modification.

In this modified example, the process when any of the BB states is in effect (step S3501: YES) differs from the bonus state process in FIG. 22. That is, when any of the BB states is in effect, a process of incrementing the BB game counter by 1 is executed in step S3507. Then, in step S3508, it is determined whether or not a small win has been achieved. If a small win has been achieved, the process proceeds to step S3509.

In step S3509, it is determined whether the specific flag is set, and whether the current BB state is the first BB state in the current favorable zone. If the specific flag is not set and it is the first BB state, in step S3510, a process is executed to add a value corresponding to the current number of medals paid out to the specific BB payout counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The specific BB payout counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to grasp the number of medals paid out in the first BB state in one favorable zone. In contrast, if the specific flag is set in step S3509, in step S3511, a process is executed to add a value corresponding to the current number of medals paid out to the BB payout counter.

After executing the processing of step S3510 or step S3511, proceed to step S3512. In step S3512, it is determined whether the counter that was added in step S3510 or step S3511 above has reached 71 or more, which corresponds to the condition for terminating the BB state. If it is less than 71, the bonus state processing ends as is. On the other hand, if it is 71 or more and the condition for terminating the BB state is met, the processing of steps S3513 to S3516 is executed and then the bonus state processing ends. The processing of steps S3513 to S3516 is the same as the processing of steps S511 to S514 above. However, in step S3515, the processing of clearing the current BB payout counter to the initial value (0) is executed. In other words, if the specific payout counter was counting the number of medals paid out during the BB state in the BB state that is currently ending, the specific BB payout counter is cleared to its initial value, and if the BB payout counter was counting the number of medals paid out during the BB state in the BB state that is currently ending, the BB payout counter is cleared to its initial value.

Figure 75 is a flowchart showing the second section display process in this modified example.

In this modified example, if it is determined in step S3610 that the AT mode end flag is not set, it is determined in step S3611 whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is set, it is determined in step S3612 whether or not the BB game counter is 1. If the BB game counter is 1, it is determined in step S3613 whether or not the specific BB payout counter is 7. If the specific BB payout counter is 7, the process proceeds to step S3607, and processing for the end of the advantageous period is executed. Even if the BB game counter is 1, if the specific BB payout counter is not 7, it is determined in step S3614 whether or not the specific flag is set, and if it is not set, processing is executed in step S3615 to set the specific flag, and processing is executed in step S3616 to set the specific command, and then this period display second processing is terminated.

If the CZ mode flag is not set in step S3611, or if the specific flag is set in step S3614, the second section display process ends. Note that the processes in steps S3601 to S3609 are the same as those in steps S3001 to S3009 above.

In this way, in a configuration in which the BB payout counter is used as a parameter in the BB state in the process for ending the favorable zone, the BB payout counter used in the BB state is configured to differ depending on the number of BB states in the favorable zone. This means that when performing the process for ending the favorable zone, it is no longer necessary to determine whether the current BB state is the first (first) BB state in the favorable zone (determining whether a specific flag is set). This simplifies the processing configuration.

In other words, by configuring the determination of whether or not it is the first BB state in the advantageous zone to be performed in the bonus state processing carried out during the BB state, it is possible to achieve overwhelming simplification of the processing compared to a configuration in which the determination of whether or not it is the first BB state described above is made in the second zone display processing carried out every game.

Specifically, when processing to end the advantageous zone is performed, a determination is made as to whether or not the specific BB payout counter is at 7. This specific BB payout counter is used only in the first BB state of the advantageous zone and is not used in any subsequent BB states, so that the specific BB payout counter is 7 only in the first BB state of the advantageous zone and is not 7 in any subsequent BB states. In this way, it is possible to configure a configuration in which processing to end the advantageous zone can be performed only in the first game of the first BB state of the advantageous zone.

The specific BB payout counter is then initialized when the BB state ends. By doing this, the specific BB payout counter will be set to 7 only in the first BB state of the favorable zone, and in subsequent BB states the specific BB payout counter will not be set to 7 but will remain at its initial value (0).

By doing this, when determining whether the end condition of the favorable period is met, it is no longer necessary to determine whether the current BB state is the first BB state in the favorable period (determining whether a specific flag is set). This simplifies the processing configuration.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, the probability of winning the first BB or the second BB is set lower than that in the second embodiment. On the other hand, in this modified example, the chance to end the advantageous zone in the first game in the BB state is given any number of times during the advantageous zone.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 76(a), in this modified example, the probability of winning at index value IV=25 is approximately 1 in 1000, and the probability of winning at index value IV=26 is also set to approximately 1 in 1000, and the probability of winning any of the BBs is approximately 1 in 500.

In the second interval display process in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 76(b), if it is determined in step S3710 that the AT mode end flag is not set, it is determined in step S3711 whether the BB game counter is 1. If the BB game counter is 1, it is determined in step S3712 whether the BB payout counter is 7. If it is the first game in the BB state and the payout number for that BB state is 7, the process proceeds to step S3707 and processing for the end of the advantageous period is executed. On the other hand, if the payout number for the BB state is not 7 in the first game in the BB state, the second interval display process is terminated as it is.

In the full stop effect setting process in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 77, if it is determined in step S1713 that the AT end command has not been received, it is determined in step S3801 whether or not the state is carried over. If it is in the carry-over state, it is determined in step S3802 that the process of setting the above-mentioned winning waiting effect is executed, and then it proceeds to step S1722. If it is not in the carry-over state, it is determined in step S3803 whether or not any BB start command has been received. If any BB state has started, it is determined in step S3804 that the process of setting the end notice first effect is executed, and then in step S3805 that the process of setting the BB flag is executed, and then it proceeds to step S1722. Even if a negative determination is made in step S3803, it proceeds to step S1720.

In the BB effect setting process of this modified example, as shown in FIG. 78, if it is determined in step S3901 that the BB flag is not set, it is determined in step S3902 whether or not the result is a carryover state, and in step S3903 it is determined whether or not a BB win can be achieved in the current game. Even if the result is a carryover state, if the result is that a BB win cannot be achieved, the BB effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the result is that a BB win can be achieved, the process of setting a win indication effect is executed in step S3904, and then the BB effect setting process is terminated.

If the BB flag is set, in step S3905, the BB game number counter is incremented by 1, and in step S3906, it is determined whether the BB game number counter is 1. If it is the first game in the BB state, in step S3907, it is determined whether the lottery result of this game is a push order bell win, and if the push order bell wins, in step S3908, a process to set the second end notice effect is executed, and then this BB effect setting process is terminated. If the push order bell is not a win, in step S3909, a process to set the third end notice effect is executed, and then the BB effect setting process is terminated.

In other words, in this modified example, the advantageous zone ends if seven medals are paid out in the first game in the BB state, regardless of whether it is the first BB state in the advantageous zone. Also, in this modified example, the advantageous zone ends if seven medals are paid out in the first game in the BB state, regardless of whether it is the BB state in the CZ mode. By ending the advantageous zone, as described above, it becomes possible to take the transition AT mode transition lottery, and transition to the AT mode becomes possible. In this way, the involvement of winning any of the BBs as an element for transitioning to the AT mode increases, and it becomes possible to realize gameplay that utilizes the advantageous zone transition processing while not eliminating the thrill of slot machines, which is to look forward to winning the BB as a so-called bonus.

<Modification 4>
In this modified example, the condition for ending the BB state is changed. That is, in this modified example, the condition for ending the BB state is satisfied when the number of predetermined minor winnings reaches a predetermined number, and the BB state is ended. Figure 79 is a flowchart showing the bonus state process in this modified example.

In the bonus state processing in this modified example, if it is determined in step S4001 that the state is not one of the BB states, it is determined in step S4002 whether any of the BB winning flags are set. If any of the BB winning flags are set, it is determined in step S4003 whether any of the BB winnings have been achieved. If any of the BB winnings have been achieved, the process proceeds to step S4004.

In step S4004, a process is executed to input a predetermined number of 8 to the BB minor win counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The BB minor win counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to grasp the number of times a minor win occurs in the bonus state (first BB state or second BB state), and is a type of special information that is updated according to the progress of the game from the time of winning the BB, which allows a transition to the BB state as a special state, until the BB state ends.

Then, in step S4005, a process is executed to clear the BB win flag, in step S4006, a process is executed to set the BB state flag, in step S4007, a process is executed to set the BB start command, and then the bonus state process is terminated.

If any of the BB states are reached in step S4001, then in step S4008 it is determined whether or not the game result of this game is a win of any of the small prizes. If none of the small prizes are reached, the bonus state processing ends. Note that in step S4008, if any of the replay prizes are reached, or if the result is a miss, then it is determined that none of the small prizes are reached. If any of the small prizes are reached, then in step S4009, the process of decrementing the BB small prize counter by 1 is executed.

In the next step S4010, a process is executed to add the current number of medals paid out to the BB payout counter. After that, in step S4011, it is determined whether the BB minor win counter has reached 0. If the BB minor win counter has not reached 0, the bonus state process is terminated. On the other hand, if the BB minor win counter has reached 0, a process is executed to terminate the bonus state from step S4012 onwards.

That is, in step S4012, the BB payout counter is cleared to 0, and in step S4013, the BB state flag that is to be ended is cleared. Then, in step S4014, the corresponding BB end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this bonus state process is ended.

In the second section display process in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 80, if it is determined in step S4110 that the AT mode end flag is not set, it is determined in step S4111 whether the CZ mode flag is set, and if it is set, it is determined in step S4112 whether the BB minor win counter has reached a predetermined specific number of 1. The specific number is set as the value of the BB minor win counter at the time of the small win before (one time before) the BB state ends. If the BB minor win counter is 1 and the number of small wins in the BB state has reached 7 in the game, the process for the end of the advantageous section is executed in step S4107. If the CZ mode flag is not set in step S4111 or if the BB minor win counter is not the specific number (1) in step S4112, the second section display process is terminated.

That is, in this modified example, when a transition to the BB state occurs during the CZ mode, the advantageous zone can be ended every time. In addition, although detailed explanation using figures is omitted, in this modified example, when a transition to the BB state occurs during the CZ mode, the number of games in the CZ mode is not counted. Specifically, even if the CZ mode flag is set in step S1017 in the winning result response process (FIG. 33), if any of the BB state flags is set, the process does not proceed to the subtraction process of the CZ counter in step S1018 and ends as is. Note that, although the number of games in the CZ mode is not counted even in the BB state, if the remaining number of games in the CZ mode becomes 0, the CZ mode flag may not be cleared if the state is the BB state.

In the transition AT mode lottery table in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 81, the winning rate of the AT mode is set for each pattern of the BB payout counter corresponding to the number of medals paid out for eight push-order bells. Specifically, the winning rate of the AT mode is set to be highest for 56 coins when the first small prize is won in all eight of the eight push-order bells, and 8 coins when the first small prize is not won in all eight of the eight push-order bells. Also, the winning rate of the AT mode transition decreases as the number of first small prize wins decreases, and the winning rate of the AT mode transition decreases as the number of first small prize wins not won decreases, so that the winning rate of the AT mode transition is set to be lowest for 32 coins when the number of first small prize wins and the number of first small prize wins not won are both four.

In the BB effect setting process in this modified example, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 82(a), in step S4201, it is determined whether the BB flag is set. If the BB flag is set, in step S4202, it is determined whether the lottery result of the current game is a win for any of the small prizes. If any of the small prizes is won, in step S4203, a process is executed to increment the BB small prize number counter provided in the various counter area 183b by 1. The BB small prize number counter is a counter that allows the CPU 181 to grasp the number of small prize wins in the BB state, and corresponds to the BB small prize counter on the main control device 101 side. In the following step S4204, an update process is executed for the BB medium and small prize effects executed in the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 in the BB state, and then this BB effect setting process is terminated.

In the BB small/medium prize performance, as shown in FIG. 82(b), a history display is performed in a specified area of the auxiliary display unit 65 to display the history of small prize winnings in the BB state. The history display is made up of eight individual history displays, such as the first history display, the second history display, ..., the eighth history display, corresponding to the upper limit of the number of small prize winnings in the BB state. In FIG. 82(b), it is shown that the first small prize winning was not successful, but the fourth to 27th small prize winnings were successful, and the second small prize winning was successful in achieving the first small prize winning.

In step S4204, the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 are controlled so that a small prize winning effect is performed in the BB/medium small prize effect to notify the player that the lottery result of this game is a small prize winning effect. In the small prize winning effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 82(b), three characters showing question marks are displayed to indicate that it is possible to achieve the first small prize winning effect or the like if the operation sequence and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 match.

In the full stop effect setting process in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 83(a), if it is determined in step S1720 that no BB end command has been received, it is determined in step S4301 whether the BB flag is set. If the BB flag is not set, the process proceeds directly to step S1722. If the BB flag is set, it is determined in step S4302 whether the CZ flag is set, and if it is not set, the process proceeds directly to step S1722. If the CZ flag is set, it is determined in step S4303 whether the current game is a small win game. If it is not a small win game, the process proceeds directly to step S1722.

If it is a small prize winning game, in step S4304, it is determined whether or not seven medals have been paid out as the playing result of this game. If seven medals have been paid out, in step S4305, the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 are controlled to perform a success effect, and then the process proceeds to step S1722.

In the successful presentation, as shown in FIG. 83(b), a specific character is shown looking happy, and the current individual history display is updated to show that seven medals have been paid out.

If seven medals have not been paid out as the result of playing the current game in step S4304, then in step S4306 it is determined whether one medal has been paid out as the result of playing the current game. If one medal has been paid out, then in step S4307 the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 are controlled to produce a "disappointment" effect, and then the process proceeds to step S1722.

In the disappointment effect, as shown in Figure 83 (c), a specified character is shown looking disappointed, and the current individual history display is updated to show that seven medals were not paid out.

If the result of step S4306 is negative and no small prizes are won in the small prize winning game, the process proceeds directly to step S1722. In this case, the current individual history display is not updated to either a display corresponding to the occurrence of seven medal payouts or a display corresponding to the occurrence of one medal payout.

In this way, by configuring the game results of multiple games in the BB state to be reflected in the AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition, it is possible to appropriately increase the level of attention to the game by continuing a game that attracts high interest, such as whether or not the AT mode transition can be won, over multiple games.

<Modification 5>
In this modification, based on the above modification 4, the number of times of winning small prizes set as the end condition is different between the first BB and the second BB. Specifically, the first BB ends with eight wins of small prizes, and the second BB ends with two wins of small prizes. Figure 84 is a flowchart showing the bonus state process in this modification.

If it is determined in step S4401 that neither of the BB states is in effect, then in step S4402 it is determined whether the BB win flag is set, and in step S4403 it is determined whether any of the BB wins have been achieved. If any of the BB wins have been achieved, then in step S4404 it is determined whether the first BB win has been achieved. If the first BB win has been achieved, then in step S4405 a process is executed to input 8 into the BB minor win counter. On the other hand, if the first BB win has not been achieved in step S4404 and the second BB win has been achieved, then in step S4406 a process is executed to input 2 into the BB minor win counter.

After executing the processing of step S4405 or step S4406, the process clears the BB win flag in step S4407, the process sets the BB state flag in step S4408, and the process sets the BB start command in step S4409, and then the bonus state processing ends.

If it is determined in step S4401 that the device is in one of the BB states, the process from step S4410 onwards is executed. In steps S4410 to S4416, the same processes as in steps S4008 to S4014 are executed.

In other words, in this modified example, in the first BB state, the first BB state ends after eight small wins, as in modified example 4 above, while in the second BB state, the second BB state ends after two small wins, which is different from the first BB state.

As shown in FIG. 85, the transition AT mode lottery table in this modified example has the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery set according to the BB payout counter, similar to the modified example 4. For the first BB state, the relationship between the number of times the winning small prize is set as the push order bell to successfully achieve the first small prize winning, the number of times the first small prize winning is not achieved, and the probability of winning the AT mode transition is the same as in modified example 4.

However, in the second BB state in this modified example, the second BB state ends with two small wins, and the number of medals paid out (14 medals) when the first small win is successfully won twice is the same as the number of medals paid out when the first small win is successfully won once but fails to be won seven times in the first BB state. Also, the number of medals paid out (8 medals) when the first small win is successfully won once but fails to be won once in the second BB state is the same as the number of medals paid out when the first small win is not successfully won even once in the first BB state.

If the first small win is successful twice in the second BB state, there is a 50% probability that the player will be selected to switch to the AT mode, and if the first small win is successful once, there is a 100% probability that the player will be selected to switch to the AT mode. The system is set up so that the probability of winning the AT mode switch is higher if the first small win is successful once than if the player is successful twice. Note that the number of medals paid out is set to not be a win for switching to the AT mode if the first small win is not successful even once in the second BB state.

In this case, there is a 50% chance of winning the AT mode if the first small win is successful both times out of two in the second BB state, and a 100% chance of winning the AT mode if the first small win is successful only once out of two, and the probability of winning the AT mode is approximately 71% since this is the probability of getting one of the six operation sequences correct. This is higher than the combined probability (approximately 26%) of winning the AT mode for each number of times the first small win is achieved in the first BB state. In other words, the probability of winning the AT mode is higher in the first BB state than in the second BB state.

In this way, by configuring the BB payout counter pattern when a transition AT mode transition lottery is performed in the second BB state to be included in the BB payout counter pattern when a transition AT mode transition lottery is performed in the first BB state, there is no need to prepare a transition AT mode transition lottery table for each type of BB state, and it becomes possible to share the transition AT mode transition lottery table in both BB states. This reduces memory capacity and makes it possible to omit the process of selecting a table depending on the BB state, which also contributes to simplifying the processing configuration.

Moreover, by utilizing the fact that the probability of a predetermined BB payout counter pattern (BB payout counter = 7) differs depending on the BB state as described above, it is possible to effectively vary the winning probability of the transition AT mode transition lottery depending on the type of BB state, without having to set the winning probability of the transition AT mode transition lottery for the above-mentioned predetermined BB payout counter pattern depending on the type of BB state.

Third Embodiment
In this embodiment, in the advantageous zone transition process when the advantageous zone is ended by the BB state before the transition to the AT mode as in the second embodiment, the ceiling game number setting process is performed using special information. Also, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the advantageous zone is in the BB state during the CZ mode or not, and regardless of whether the BB payout counter is 7 or not, the advantageous zone is ended in the first game in the BB state. Figure 86 is a flowchart showing the advantageous zone transition process in this embodiment.

In step S4501, a process is executed to grasp the BB payout counter as the special information. In the following step S4502, a lottery process for the ceiling game number is executed. As shown in FIG. 87, the ceiling game number table in this embodiment is set so that the ceiling game number selected differs depending on the set value and whether the BB payout counter is at a specific number of 7 or not.

Specifically, the probability of the ceiling game number being set to a shorter number is higher when the BB payout counter is a specific number than when there is no specific number, and the probability that the ceiling game number is set to 1 game is 20% when the BB payout counter is a specific number, and is set to 1% when the BB payout counter is not a specific number. Also, the probability that the ceiling game number is set to 2 to 100 games is higher when the BB payout counter is a specific number than when it is not a specific number, and the probability that the ceiling game number is set to 701 to 1000 games is higher when the BB payout counter is not a specific number than when it is a specific number. In addition, in relation to the setting value, the higher the setting value, the easier it is to set a shorter ceiling game number.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the BB state is entered before the AT mode is entered, and the first minor prize is successfully achieved in the first game in the BB state (7 medals are paid out), the ceiling game number is set to 1 game with a probability of about 20%. As a result, it is possible to enter the AT mode in the next game without being drawn for the AT mode entry lottery. This makes it possible to expect the same effects as the second embodiment described above.

After executing the lottery process for the ceiling game number in step S4502, a process is executed in step S4503 to input a value corresponding to the ceiling game number into the ceiling counter. Then, in step S4504, a process is executed to set the ceiling command as an output target to the display control device 81.

In the next step S4505, it is determined whether any of the BB state flags are set, and whether the advantageous zone has been entered during the BB state. That is, if the advantageous zone is ended in the first game of the BB state, and then a transition to the advantageous zone occurs during the BB state, a process of setting a specific flag is executed in step S4506. Then, in step S4507, a process of inputting 100 to a specific counter provided in the various counter area 106e is executed. The specific counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games since the specific flag was set, and a process of subtracting 1 each time one game is played while the specific flag is set, and when the specific flag becomes 0, a process of clearing the specific flag is executed. As described above, when the specific flag is set, the end of the advantageous zone using the BB state is restricted. That is, in this embodiment, when the advantageous zone is re-set using the BB state, the end of the advantageous zone using the BB state is restricted for 100 games thereafter.

Figure 88 is a flowchart showing the lottery result response processing in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, if the push order bell is won in step S4609, it is determined in step S4610 whether or not any of the AT mode flags are set. If any of the AT mode flags are set, processing is executed in step S4611 to notify the push order corresponding to the first minor prize, and the push order notification command is set in step S4612, after which the lottery result response processing is terminated. These processes are the same as those in the first and second embodiments described above.

In contrast, in this embodiment, if none of the AT mode flags are set in step S4610, it is determined in step S4613 whether or not it is in any of the BB states. If it is in any of the BB states, it is determined in step S4614 whether the BB game counter is 0 and it is the first game in the BB state. If it is the first game in the BB state, a notification lottery table is obtained in step S4615, and notification lottery processing is executed in step S4616.

As shown in FIG. 89, the notification lottery table in this embodiment is set so that the larger the value of the number of games in the advantageous zone AG, the more likely it is that the push order notification for the first game in the BB state will occur. Specifically, if the number of games in the advantageous zone AG is up to 100, the push order notification will occur with a 5% probability, whereas if the number of games in the advantageous zone AG is 901 or more, the push order notification will occur with a 100% probability. In other words, if it takes a while for the transition to AT mode to occur after entering the advantageous zone and the player is stuck, the push order notification for the first game in the BB state will be more likely to occur.

In the second interval display process in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 90, if it is determined in step S4710 that the AT mode end flag is not set, it is determined in step S4711 whether or not a specific flag is set. If the specific flag is not set, it is determined in step S4712 whether or not the BB game counter is 1. If the BB game counter is 1 and it is the first game in the BB state, the process proceeds to step S4707 and processing for the end of the advantageous interval is executed.

If the specific flag is set in step S4711, a process of decrementing the specific counter by 1 is executed in step S4713. Then, in step S4714, it is determined whether the specific counter has become 0, and if it has not become 0, the second section display process is terminated. If the specific counter has become 0, a process of clearing the specific flag is executed in step S4715. Then, in step S4716, a process of setting a clear command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and this second section display process is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the clear command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 to notify that the specific flag has been cleared and that it is possible to reset the ceiling number of games.

As described above, even if the ceiling number of games set in the advantageous zone transition processing is changed based on special information rather than executing the transition AT mode transition lottery based on special information in the advantageous zone transition processing or varying the winning probability of the transition AT mode transition lottery based on special information, it is possible to set the advantageous zone using special information that is updated according to the progress of the game from the BB win to the end of the BB state.

In this case, since it is easier to set a shorter ceiling game number when the advantageous zone transition process is performed during the BB state than when the advantageous zone transition process is performed during the normal gaming state, it is possible to improve the advantage of the BB state without changing the parameters of the BB state itself, such as the upper limit payout number in the BB state or the probability of winning a small prize. Therefore, with a relatively simple configuration, it is possible to increase the attention to a BB win that allows a transition to the BB state.

It is configured so that the advantageous zone can be ended regardless of the game result of the first game in the BB state, and if a transition to the advantageous zone occurs during the BB state, a specific flag is set, and the end of the advantageous zone is restricted in the first game in the BB state thereafter. In this way, even if the advantageous zone is ended regardless of the game result of the first game in the BB state, it is possible to set a limit on the chance to end the advantageous zone.

The specific flag is cleared when 100 games have been played in the advantageous zone, and every 100 games, a chance to reset the ceiling number of games is given by winning a BB. This creates hope that the specific flag will be cleared by continuing to play, stimulating the desire to play.

<Modification 1>
In this modified example, the configuration is such that the limitation of the re-setting of the advantageous zone using the BB state for a predetermined number of games is determined by lottery. Figure 91 is a flowchart showing the advantageous zone transition processing in this modified example.

In this modified example, similar to steps S4501 to S4504 above, after executing the process of setting the ceiling game number in steps S4801 to S4804, it is determined in step S4805 whether or not it is in any of the BB states. If it is in any of the BB states, in step S4806, a process of acquiring a specific flag set lottery table from the various table storage area 105a is executed, and in step S4807, a specific flag set lottery process is executed.

As shown in FIG. 92, the specific flag set lottery table has different probabilities of setting a specific flag depending on the ceiling game number that has been set this time. Specifically, the probability of a specific flag being set increases as the ceiling game number decreases, and the probability of a specific flag being set decreases as the ceiling game number increases.

After executing the specific flag set lottery process in step S4807, it is determined in step S4808 whether or not a win has been obtained in the specific flag set lottery process, and if a win has not been obtained, the processing at the time of transition to the favorable zone is terminated. If a win has been obtained, a specific flag is set in step S4809, and a process of inputting 100 to the specific counter is executed in step S4810, after which the processing at the time of transition to the favorable zone is terminated.

In this way, by varying the set rate of the specific flag depending on the set ceiling number of games, and configuring it so that the higher the ceiling number of games, the less likely the specific flag is to be set, it is possible to avoid eliminating the gameplay element of a situation where a short ceiling number of games is set by achieving a BB win when there is still a lot of games left until the ceiling number of games is reached, while also making it possible to preferably avoid an incident in which the ceiling number of games is reset due to accidentally achieving a BB win even when there is only a short number of games left until the ceiling number of games is reached.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, the notification lottery table used in the push order notification lottery for the first game in BB state (step S4616) is different from that in the third embodiment described above.

In the notification lottery table in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 93, when a transition to the BB state occurs during normal mode, the push order notification for the first game in the BB state is set so that a state where the push order notification is likely to occur and a state where the push order notification is unlikely to occur alternate in increments of 100 games. Specifically, when the number of games in the favorable zone AG is 1 to 100, the push order notification occurs with a low probability of 10%, while when the number of games in the favorable zone AG is 101 to 200, the push order notification occurs with a high probability of 30%. Then, when the number of games in the favorable zone AG is 201 to 300, the low probability is 10%, when it is 301 to 400, the high probability is 30%, and when it is 401 to 500, the low probability is 10%, and so on. Thus, a state where the push order notification occurs with a low probability and a state where the push order notification occurs with a high probability are repeated.

In that case, in order to generate a push order notification in the first game of the BB state and reset the advantageous ceiling number of games, it would be preferable to cause a transition to the BB state when there is a high probability of the push order notification occurring.

As described above, in this embodiment, the advantageous zone ends in the first game in the BB state regardless of whether the player is in the CZ mode or not. In order to efficiently obtain a chance to transition to the AT mode, it is preferable to avoid the CZ mode, which is likely to win the AT mode transition lottery, and to transition to the BB state in a situation where the push order notification is likely to occur.

In this regard, in this modified example, the transition rate to CZ mode is configured to vary in relation to the advantageous zone game number AG, and transition to CZ mode is unlikely to occur in a state where the above-mentioned push order notification is likely to occur, and transition to CZ mode is likely to occur in a state where the push order notification is unlikely to occur. More specifically, when the advantageous zone game number AG is 1 to 100 and the push order notification occurs with a low probability, transition to CZ mode is likely, when the advantageous zone game number AG is 101 to 200 and the push order notification occurs with a high probability, transition to CZ mode is unlikely, and when the advantageous zone game number AG is 201 to 300, the push order notification occurs with a low probability and transition to CZ mode is likely, and so on. In this way, the state where it is easy to transition to CZ mode and the state where it is easy to generate the push order notification are set to occur alternately.

In other words, in situations where a transition to CZ mode is likely to occur, the player can hope for a win in CZ mode to transition to AT mode, and in situations where a transition to CZ mode is unlikely to occur, the player can hope for a favorable reset of the ceiling number of games by utilizing the BB state. By having these occur alternately in rapid succession, it is possible to maintain the anticipation of a transition to AT mode in any situation.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, the specific flag is not set, and the advantageous zone can be reset at any time using the BB state. However, in this modification, the end condition of the BB state is changed, and a larger number of games are required to end the BB state. Figure 94 is a flowchart showing the bonus state process in this modification.

In this modified example, if it is determined in step S4901 that any of the BB states exists, the BB game counter is incremented by 1 in step S4907. Then, in step S4908, it is determined whether or not a small win has occurred, and if so, the BB payout counter is incremented in step S4909.

In the following step S4910, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag is set. If the first BB state flag is set and the game is in the first BB state, it is determined in step S4911 whether or not the BB payout counter is 71 or more. If it is 71 or more and 71 or more medals have been paid out in the first BB state, the process for ending the BB state from step S4913 onwards is executed, and then the bonus state process is terminated.

In contrast, if the first BB state flag is not set in step S4910 and the state is the second BB state, then in step S4912 it is determined whether the BB payout counter is 250 or greater. If it is 250 or greater and 250 or more medals have been paid out in the second BB state, then the process for ending the BB state from step S4913 onwards is executed, and then the bonus state process is terminated. If the number of medals paid out in the first BB state is less than 71 in step S4911, or if the number of medals paid out in the second BB state is less than 250 in step S4912, then the bonus state process is terminated.

Note that the processes in steps S4901 to S4906 and steps S4913 to S4916 are similar to the processes in steps S501 to S506 and steps S511 to S514 described above.

A detailed explanation using figures will be omitted, but in the processing at the time of transition to the favorable zone in this modified example, after the processing of steps S4501 to S4504 in FIG. 86 is executed, the processing at the time of transition to the favorable zone ends without executing the processing of steps S4505 to S4507.

In the second interval display process in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 95, if it is determined in step S5010 that the AT mode end flag is not set, it is determined in step S5011 whether the BB game counter is 1. If the BB game counter is 1, the process proceeds to step S5007, and processing for the end of the advantageous interval is executed. If the BB game counter is not 1 in step S5011, the second interval display process is terminated.

In other words, in this modified example, a specific flag is not set when the advantageous zone transitions during the BB state, and if it becomes possible to achieve a BB win regardless of the number of games since the previous ceiling game number was set, it becomes possible to end the advantageous zone in the first game of the BB state in which the win has been achieved, and to challenge the resetting of the ceiling game number.

However, in this modified example, the maximum number of medals to be paid out is different between the first BB state and the second BB state as the termination condition, and as shown in FIG. 96, the number of games required to terminate the first BB state is different between the first BB state and the second BB state. Specifically, the first BB state is terminated when 71 or more medals are paid out, and 1 in 6 of the push order bells that are won at about 1.5 times per game will pay out 7 medals, and 1 in 2 out of 5 in 6 operation sequences will pay out 1 medal, so if the first BB state is consumed mainly during the non-AT mode where push order notifications do not occur, it will take about 55 games to terminate the first BB state. In contrast, the second BB state ends when 250 or more medals are paid out, which is more than the first BB state, and if the second BB state is consumed during a non-AT mode, it will take approximately 192 games, more than the first BB state, to end the second BB state.

In other words, if the first BB is won and the player transitions to the first BB state and has the ceiling number of games reset, it takes approximately 55 games to end the first BB state and have the next ceiling number of games reset, whereas if the second BB is won and the player transitions to the second BB state and has the ceiling number of games reset, it takes approximately 192 games to end the second BB state and have the next ceiling number of games reset. In other words, if the player wins the first BB, it takes fewer games until the next ceiling number of games can be reset, which is more advantageous for the player.

Between the first BB and the second BB, the second BB is easier to win. This prevents the first BB from becoming too advantageous, increases the rarity of winning the first BB, and makes it possible to draw a lot of attention to winning the first BB during normal gameplay.

By doing this, it is possible to adjust the frequency with which the ceiling number of games is reset simply by changing the conditions for ending the BB state. This makes it possible to diversify the gameplay with a relatively simple configuration.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, the present invention is not limited to the description of each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the modified examples, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the modified examples, or may be applied to each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the modified examples in a combined form or in part or in whole. In addition, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the modified examples. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exerted) of each of the configurations to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of the embodiments and the modified examples, or may be applied in a combined form or in part or in whole.

(1) In a configuration in which special information updated according to the progress of the game from the BB win, which enables a transition to the BB state as a special state, to the end of the BB state is used in processing related to the instruction function, a BB payout counter, a BB game counter, an RT game counter, a BB minor win counter, etc. have been described as examples of special information, but the special information is not limited to these and may be other information. For example, a counter for grasping the number of minor wins during the BB state may be the special information, or a counter for grasping the number of medal increases or decreases during the BB state may be the special information. Also, a counter for grasping the number of games played from the BB win to the end of the BB state may be the special information, or a counter for grasping the number of medal increases or decreases from the BB win to the end of the BB state may be the special information.

(2) In a configuration in which special information updated according to the progress of the game from when a BB win occurs, which enables a transition to the BB state as a special state, until the BB state ends, is used for processing related to the instruction function, processing at the time of transition to an advantageous zone and processing for the end of an advantageous zone have been described as examples of processing related to the instruction function, but the processing related to the instruction function performed using special information is not limited to these and may be other processing. For example, the configuration may be such that special information is used for the AT mode top-up lottery, or the configuration may be such that special information is used for the CZ mode transition lottery. In addition, the timing for executing processing related to the instruction function using special information is not limited to when a transition to an advantageous zone or the end of an advantageous zone, but may be a specified timing during the advantageous zone.

For example, if the configuration is such that an additional draw or a CZ mode transition draw is performed using special information, when a specific role is won during the BB state, the probability of winning the additional draw or the CZ mode transition draw can be varied using the BB payout counter up to that point (for example, if the BB payout counter is a specific number, it is easier to win, and if it is not a specific number, it is harder to win), making it possible to effectively associate game progress during the advantageous zone with game progress during the BB state.

(3) In a configuration in which special information updated according to the progress of the game from the BB win that enables a transition to the BB state as a special state until the BB state ends is used for processing related to the instruction function, the special state is not limited to the BB state, and may be, for example, the RT state, the REG state, the CB state, the MB state, etc. That is, for example, if the RT state is the special state, after winning a transition result (transition replay) that enables a transition to a specified RT state in which the probability of winning any of the replays is high, the transition result is won and the game transitions to a specified RT state, and the end condition in the specified RT state is satisfied, the special information updated according to the progress of the game until the end condition in the specified RT state is satisfied may be used for processing related to the instruction function. In this case, the special information may be, for example, a game number counter (RT game counter) for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games continued in the RT state, a payout counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of medals paid out during the RT state, or an increase/decrease counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of medals increased/decreased during the RT state.

(4) In the BB state as a special state, only the probability of winning the common bell is higher than in the normal game state and the carry-over state, and there is almost no difference in the advantageous degree between these states. However, the probability of winning the common bell may also be the same as in the normal game state and the carry-over state, and there may be no difference in the advantageous degree between these states. Also, the probability of winning a small prize such as a common bell or a replay in the BB state may be lowered, or the number of medals paid out when a small prize is won in the BB state may be reduced, so that the normal game state and the carry-over state are more advantageous than the BB state. By making the normal game state and the carry-over state more advantageous than the BB state, the merit of transitioning to the BB state is reduced, and it is also possible to more precisely determine the timing of transitioning to the BB state and resetting the advantageous zone.

Furthermore, the difference in the degree of advantage between the BB state and the normal game state or the carryover state may be made larger than that in each of the above embodiments by increasing the probability of winning small prizes such as common bells or replays in the BB state, or by increasing the number of medals paid out when a small prize is won in the BB state.

As a configuration to make the difference in the degree of advantage between the BB state and the normal game state or the carryover state larger than that of each of the above embodiments, in addition to the configuration to increase the probability of winning small roles or replays during the BB state as described above, or to increase the number of medals paid out when a small role is won, the configuration of the priority setting process (step S313) when the push order bell is won may be changed. That is, in each of the above embodiments, the priority setting process when the push order bell is won is configured to perform number priority control in any state, so that the first small role can be won by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in the order corresponding to the operation order including the first small role when the push order bell is won in any state. This may be changed to a configuration to perform number priority control in the BB state, while performing number priority control in the normal game state or the carryover state. As a result, in normal game mode or carryover mode, even if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a sequence that corresponds to the operation sequence including the first small win when the push order bell is won, the fourth small win to the 27th small win will be won instead of the first small win, or the win will be missed. In other words, in normal game mode or carryover mode, the first small win will not be won when the push order bell is won, and the difference in the degree of advantage between the BB state and the normal game mode or carryover mode will be greater than in each of the above embodiments.

(5) Although the advantageous zone is ended in a game before the end of the BB state, the advantageous zone transition processing is performed during the BB state. However, the advantageous zone may be ended before the transition to the BB state. For example, the advantageous zone may be ended in a game in which the BB is won. In this way, the advantageous zone ends when the BB is won, and then the transition to the BB state occurs before the transition to the advantageous zone, thereby realizing a gameplay that allows the advantageous zone transition processing to be executed during the BB state. In addition, for example, a predetermined end result (for example, a predetermined replay) may be provided, and the advantageous zone may be ended based on the predetermined end result win or the predetermined end result win. In this case, the advantageous zone is ended based on the predetermined end result win or the predetermined end result win in the carryover state, and then the transition to the BB state occurs before the re-transition to the advantageous zone, thereby realizing a gameplay that allows the advantageous zone transition processing to be executed during the BB state.

(6) As in the first embodiment, when a transition to the BB state occurs during the AT mode, the advantageous zone ends in the first game of the BB state, but it may be configured to differ whether or not to end the advantageous zone in the first game of the BB state depending on the number of games remaining in the AT mode. That is, for example, when the number of games remaining in the AT mode is a predetermined number (e.g., 30) or less, the advantageous zone ends in the first game of the BB state, while when the number of games remaining in the AT mode is more than the predetermined number, the advantageous zone may not end in the first game of the BB state. In addition, a termination lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to end the advantageous zone in the first game of the BB state, and the winning probability of the termination lottery may differ depending on the number of games remaining in the AT mode, and when the number of games remaining in the AT mode is less than the predetermined number, it is easy to win the termination lottery, and when it is more than the predetermined number, it is difficult to win the termination lottery. In this way, it is possible to preferably avoid an event in which the AT mode ends by establishing a BB win in a situation where there are still many games remaining in the AT mode.

(7) In the first embodiment, when a transition to the BB state occurs during the AT mode, the advantageous zone ends in the first game of the BB state. However, it is also possible to use special information to determine whether or not to end the advantageous zone in the first game of the BB state. That is, as in the second embodiment, the advantageous zone may end if the BB payout counter is a specific number (7) in the first game of the BB state, and the advantageous zone may not end if the BB payout counter is not a specific number in the first game of the BB state. By doing this, for example, if a BB win is unintentionally achieved, it is possible to avoid the first minor win being achieved and the advantageous zone ending with the BB payout counter being set to a number other than the specific number by performing an operation that does not follow the push order notification when the push order bell is won.

(8) The types of BB states are not limited to the first BB state and the second BB state, and other BB states may be set, or only one type of BB state may be set.

(9) The configuration may vary depending on the type of BB state, with or without the end of the advantageous zone during the BB state. For example, the configuration may be such that the advantageous zone ends in the first game of the first BB state, but does not end in the first game of the second BB state, or vice versa. Also, in a configuration in which an end lottery is conducted to determine whether or not the advantageous zone ends, and the advantageous zone ends when the end lottery is won, the configuration may be such that the end lottery is easily won in the first game of the first BB state, but is difficult to win in the first game of the second BB state, or vice versa.

(10) Depending on the type of BB state, a transition to an advantageous zone may or may not occur during the BB state. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the advantageous zone transition lottery is won or is more likely to be won in the first BB state, while the advantageous zone transition lottery is not won or is less likely to be won than in the first BB state in the second BB state, or vice versa. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which, although a favorable zone transition lottery can be won in any BB state, a favorable zone flag is set in the game in which the lottery is won in the first BB state, while a favorable zone flag is not set in the game in which the lottery is won in the second BB state, and the favorable zone flag is set after the second BB state ends or when the second BB state ends.

In this case, in relation to (9) above, a BB state may be provided in which the favorable zone has ended or is likely to end, but transition to the favorable zone is difficult or not possible, or a BB state in which the favorable zone has not ended or is difficult to end, but transition to the favorable zone is easy or is possible.

(11) Regarding the special information used in processing when transitioning to a favorable zone, a configuration has been described in which the results of one game or multiple games are reflected using, for example, the number of medals paid out in the first game in BB state (BB payout counter), the number of games in BB state (BB game counter), the number of games from BB winning to winning (RT game counter), or the number of medals paid out based on winning eight small roles during BB state (BB payout counter). However, the special information used in processing for the end of a favorable zone may also be configured to reflect the results of one game or multiple games. That is, as a result of playing one game, in the first game in the BB state, if the BB payout counter as special information is a specific number of 7, the advantageous period is ended, but if the BB payout counter is not a specific number, the advantageous period is not ended. However, for example, if the number of medals paid out (BB payout counter) based on a predetermined number of small wins (for example, 7 times) during the BB state is a specific number, the advantageous period is ended or ended easily, but if it is a value different from the specific number, the advantageous period is not ended or is ended more difficultly than if it is a specific number.

(12) Although the configuration is such that a BB win can be achieved when the game lottery result is a losing result, it is also possible to achieve a BB win even when the result is not a losing result by prioritizing a BB win over a small winning combination win, or a BB win over a replay winning combination, or by using both of these configurations. In this way, it is possible to preferably avoid an event where a BB win cannot be achieved just before the end of the AT mode, causing the AT mode to end as it is.

(13) For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a 2-bet game can be played in addition to a 3-bet game, and the probability of a lottery result being a negative outcome in the 2-bet game is higher than the probability of a lottery result being a negative outcome in the 3-bet game. In this way, by switching to a 2-bet game, it is possible to achieve a BB win more easily than in a 3-bet game, and it is possible to preferably avoid an event in which a BB win cannot be achieved just before the end of the AT mode, causing the AT mode to end as it is.

(14) When a transition to the BB state occurs during the AT mode, the advantageous zone ends in the first game of the BB state. However, the game in the BB state in which the advantageous zone ends may be different depending on the number of games remaining in the AT mode. For example, when the number of games remaining in the AT mode is large (e.g., 30 or more games), the advantageous zone ends at the end of the BB state (e.g., the seventh game), and when the number of games remaining in the AT mode is small (e.g., less than 30 games), the advantageous zone ends at the beginning of the BB state (e.g., the first game). Then, the game in which the advantageous zone ends during the BB state is made different so that the number of games remaining in the AT mode is as small as possible when the advantageous zone ends. In this way, it is possible to preferably avoid an event in which the advantageous zone ends when there are still many games remaining in the AT mode.

In this case, it is preferable to configure the AT mode transition lottery table at the time of transition in the favorable zone transition process to be different depending on the number of games in the BB state where the favorable zone has ended. Specifically, when the favorable zone has ended in the first game in the BB state, the pattern of the number of medal payouts for one game is set in the AT mode transition lottery table at the time of transition (if the BB payout counter is 7, the AT mode transition is won, but if it is other than 7, the AT mode transition is not won, etc.), and when the favorable zone has ended in the second game in the BB state, the pattern of the number of medal payouts for two games is set in the AT mode transition lottery table at the time of transition (if the BB payout counter is 14, the AT mode transition is won, but if it is other than 14, the AT mode transition is not won, etc.).

(15) Regardless of the number of later-added games (later-added counter) during the AT mode, the number of remaining games for display at which a winning permission notification or a winning instruction notification is made may be set to a number of games greater than the number of remaining games for display at which a later-added notification is generated. By doing so, it becomes possible to carefully determine whether or not there is a later-added number of games before deciding whether or not to transition to the BB state, thereby improving the playability during the AT mode.

(16) In the first game of the BB state during the AT mode, if the BB payout counter is a specific number (7), the advantageous period ends, but if the counter is not the specific number, the advantageous period does not end. In addition, if there is a number of games to be added later, the push order notification may be less likely to occur or may not occur at all in the first game of the BB state compared to when there is no number of games to be added later.

(17) Instead of a configuration in which the advantageous zone transition processing is executed in the game in which the advantageous zone transition lottery was won (at the start of the game), a configuration in which the advantageous zone transition processing is executed at the end of the game in which the advantageous zone transition lottery was won, or a configuration in which the advantageous zone transition processing is executed at the start of the game following the game in which the advantageous zone transition lottery was won, has been described. However, the timing of executing the advantageous zone transition lottery is not limited to the above, and may be at least after the advantageous zone transition lottery is won. For example, it may be when the first stop switch 42-44 of the game in which the advantageous zone transition lottery was won is operated, it may be after the medal payout of the game in which the advantageous zone transition lottery was won is completed, it may be when the bet operation of the game following the game in which the advantageous zone transition lottery was won, or it may be at the end of the game following the game in which the advantageous zone transition lottery was won. Also, a configuration in which the advantageous zone transition processing is executed in a game several games after the game in which the advantageous zone transition lottery was won may be used.

(18) An example has been described in which a favorable zone transition lottery is executed based on the game start operation (in the lottery result response processing), and if the favorable zone transition lottery is won, the favorable zone winning game flag is set, and then the favorable zone flag is set in the zone display first processing or the zone display second processing. However, a configuration may also be used in which processing is performed to set the favorable zone flag if the favorable zone transition lottery is won.

(19) Although a configuration has been described in which the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed based on the start operation of the game, it may also be executed based on the end operation of the game (for example, in the winning result response process). In this case, after winning the advantageous zone transition lottery executed based on the end operation, it is preferable that the advantageous zone flag is set before the start operation of the next game becomes possible.

(20) The special information that is updated according to the progress of the game from when the BB win, which allows a transition to the BB state as a special state, is won until the BB state ends is information that is not initialized in the initialization process of the advantageous zone information at the end of the advantageous zone, but it may be configured to be initialized. Even with this configuration, for example, after the end of the advantageous zone, it is possible to execute the processing at the time of transition to the advantageous zone based on the special information that is in the BB state and has been updated according to the progress of the game during the normal zone.

(21) When the ceiling game is reached in which the ceiling counter is set to 0, the AT mode winning flag is set without an AT mode transition lottery being held. However, even when the ceiling game is reached, the AT mode transition lottery may be held. In this case, the AT mode winning flag may be set in both cases where the AT mode transition lottery is won and where the AT mode transition lottery is not won in the game in which the ceiling game is reached. Note that when the AT mode transition lottery is won in the game in which the ceiling game is reached, a more advantageous benefit may be awarded (for example, it may be easier to set to the advantageous second AT mode) than when the AT mode transition lottery is not won and the AT mode transition flag is set.

(23) A configuration has been described in which a first excess flag is set as information that the upper limit game number of the favorable zone has been reached, and a second excess flag is set as information that the upper limit increase number of the favorable zone has been reached, and the occurrence rate of the push order notification in the first game of the BB state in the AT mode is made different depending on the presence or absence of the first excess flag and the second excess flag. However, a configuration may be used in which the occurrence rate of the push order notification in the first game of the BB state in the AT mode is made different depending on the number of added games that occurred in a situation in which the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set, and/or depending on the number of added times that occurred in a situation in which the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set. In other words, a configuration may be used in which the more the number of added games that occurred in a situation in which the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set, and/or the more the number of added times that occurred in a situation in which the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set, the more likely it is that a push order notification will occur in the first game of the BB state.

(24) Although the specific flag allows the CPU 102 to know whether or not it is the first BB state in the favorable zone, the CPU 102 may be configured to know how many times the BB state has occurred since transitioning to the favorable zone. In this case, a specific counter may be provided in the various counter areas 106e, and the specific counter may be incremented by 1 each time the game transitions to the favorable zone and transitions to the BB state, thereby allowing the CPU 102 to know how many times the BB state has occurred since transitioning to the favorable zone.

In this case, for example, as in the second embodiment, the CPU 102 determines that it is the first BB state during the favorable zone by a specific flag, a specific BB game counter, or a specific payout counter, and ends the favorable zone if seven medals are paid out in the first game of the BB state. Alternatively, the CPU 102 may determine that it is the first BB state during the favorable zone by a specific counter being 1, and end the favorable zone if seven medals are paid out in the first game of the BB state.

The ease of ending the advantageous zone may also be different depending on how many times the BB state has occurred since the transition to the advantageous zone. Specifically, for example, when applied to the second embodiment, in the first BB state after the transition to the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone may end or be more likely to end if seven medals are paid out in the first game of the BB state, and in the second BB state after the transition to the advantageous zone, even if seven medals are paid out in the first game of the BB state, the advantageous zone may be more difficult to end or may not end at all than in the first case.

(25) In the above explanation, it is assumed that if a winning combination cannot be achieved in the game in which the first BB or second BB is won, the game will transition to a carryover state. However, the first BB winning combination and the second BB winning combination may not be carried over, and the first BB winning combination and the second BB winning combination may be cleared if a winning combination cannot be achieved in the BB winning game.

(26) The initial number of games in the AT mode is set to 50, but it may be more or less than that. However, when the AT mode is reset during the BB state, it is possible to configure the AT mode to continue longer than the games until the BB state ends, so that a chance to transition to the BB state again during the reset AT mode is given. In addition, by changing the end condition of the BB state or the number of games continued in the AT mode, when the AT mode is reset during the BB state, there may be a case where a chance to transition to the BB state again during the reset AT mode is given (when the AT mode continues longer than the BB state) and a case where a chance to transition to the BB state again during the reset AT mode is not given (when the AT mode does not continue longer than the BB state). It may also be the case that no opportunity to reset the AT mode is given by causing a transition to the BB state again during the reset AT mode (when the AT mode does not continue longer than the BB state).

(27) Although a configuration has been described in which the advantageous zone ends or does not end based on the player's operation in the first game in the BB state, utilizing the fact that the number of medals paid out becomes a specific number or a non-specific number depending on the operation mode of the stop switches 42-44 in the first game in the BB state, any configuration may be used as long as the advantageous zone ends or does not end based on the player's operation at least during the BB state. For example, a configuration may be made in which, at least during the BB state, a 2-bet game can be played in addition to a 3-bet game, and the advantageous zone ends if the first game in the BB state is played as a 3-bet game, while the advantageous zone ends if the 2-bet game is played.

(28) The transition to the BB state is the first specific operation of challenging to end the advantageous zone, the satisfaction of the end condition in the first game of the BB state (generating the payout of seven medals) is the second specific operation that ends the advantageous zone, and failure to satisfy the end condition in the first game of the BB state is the third specific operation that prevents the advantageous zone from ending, and information that the end condition was not satisfied is stored as a specific flag, but these first, second, and third specific operations are not limited to those described above and may be any operation performed by the player.

For example, normal replay A to normal replay C may be set so that the winning replay differs depending on the operation sequence of stop switches 42 to 44, and the second specific operation may be the successful establishment of a specified replay winning when normal replay A to normal replay C are won (the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation sequence corresponding to the specified replay winning), and the third specific operation may be the failure to establish the specified replay winning (the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a sequence different from the operation sequence corresponding to the specified replay winning, resulting in a replay winning different from the specified replay winning).

The first specific operation may be a stop operation that establishes a transition result winning that causes a transition to an RT state in which the probability of winning any of the replays is high, or a state transition is not required, and may be, for example, a stop operation that establishes a predetermined specific minor win (such as a watermelon). In these cases, it is preferable that an operation different from the first specific operation is allowed in the game, and more specifically, a configuration may be adopted in which an operation that does not establish the transition result winning or an operation that does not establish a specific minor win is allowed.

(29) In the third embodiment, a specific flag is cleared by playing a predetermined number of games (100 games) after the specific flag is set. In this case, a clear command is output to the display control device 81 to notify the player that the ceiling number of games can be reset. However, the configuration may be such that no notification is given that the ceiling number of games can be reset. Also, the configuration may be such that whether or not to issue the notification is determined by lottery.

(30) In the third embodiment, the specific flag is cleared after a predetermined number of games (100 games) have been played since the specific flag was set. However, there may be multiple predetermined numbers of games, and the number of games until the specific flag is cleared may vary depending on the predetermined number of games that is set. The predetermined number of games that is set may be determined by lottery.

(31) In the advantageous zone transition processing, the transition AT mode transition lottery and the ceiling game number lottery are performed using special information, but the lottery results of the game in which the advantageous zone transition processing is performed may affect these lotteries. Specifically, for example, even if the transition AT mode transition lottery is performed using the same BB payout counter value, the transition AT mode transition lottery may be more likely to be won when the lottery result of the game in which the transition AT mode transition lottery is performed is a second result (e.g., Cherry B) different from the first result (e.g., Cherry A) than when the lottery result is a first result (e.g., Cherry A).

(32) In the advantageous zone transition process, the transition AT mode transition lottery and ceiling game number lottery are performed using special information, but these lotteries may be influenced by the setting value set in the winning probability setting process. Specifically, for example, even when the transition AT mode transition lottery is performed using the same BB payout counter value, the transition AT mode transition lottery may be more likely to be won when a second setting value different from the first setting value is set than when a first setting value is set.

(33) Although the advantageous period is configured to end in the first game in the BB state, the advantageous period may not end but only the AT mode or CZ mode may end.

(34) In the processing at the time of transition to the favorable zone, the special information is used to draw a lottery for the transition to the AT mode and the ceiling number of games. However, it is also possible to configure the configuration so that a suggestive effect of a set value may occur when transitioning to the favorable zone, and the special information is used to draw a lottery for the execution of the suggestive effect.

(35) By transitioning to the BB state, the probability of winning the push order bell may be made higher than in the previous state (normal game state or carryover state).

(36) The conditions for ending the advantageous zone may be different from those described above. Specifically, the upper limit number of games (1500 games) may be greater or less than those described above. Also, the upper limit number of increments (2400 coins) may be greater or less than those described above. Furthermore, although the advantageous zone is always ended when the AT mode ends, the advantageous zone may not end even when the AT mode ends. When the advantageous zone does not end when the AT mode ends, for example, the advantageous zone may not end if the end lottery is not won after the end lottery is executed when the AT mode ends. Also, when the number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone is a predetermined number or more at the end of the AT mode, the advantageous zone may not end or may be difficult to end, or the above-mentioned end lottery may be difficult to win, or the advantageous zone may be ended or not depending on the number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone at the end of the AT mode.

(37) Although the description is based on the premise that the gaming machine can only execute 3-bet games, it may be configured to execute 2-bet games and 1-bet games. In this case, for example, a configuration is made in which 2-bet games and 3-bet games can be executed, and the 1st BB or 2nd BB can be won in the 2-bet game, and the 1st BB or 2nd BB cannot be won in the 3-bet game, and further, the 1st BB or 2nd BB can be won in the 2-bet game, and the 1st BB or 2nd BB cannot be won in the 3-bet game. Also, the 3-bet game has a higher net increase per game in the AT mode than the 2-bet game, and the probability of winning the CZ mode transition lottery is higher. In this way, the AT mode can be consumed in the 3-bet game, the CZ mode transition lottery can be won, and the game can be played in such a way that the game can be played after the end of the AT mode or the transition to the CZ mode, and then the game can be switched to the 2-bet game to reset the advantageous zone in the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state. In this case, it is possible to avoid unintentionally winning the first or second BB (ending the advantageous period) in a three-bet game.

(38) Although the push order notification is generated when the AT mode flag is not set, the push order notification may be generated if the player is in an advantageous zone even if the AT mode flag is not set. In this case, for example, the push order notification may be generated more easily in AT mode than in normal mode, and the push order notification may be generated more easily in AT mode than in CZ mode. The push order notification may also be generated more easily in CZ mode than in normal mode, and the occurrence rate of the push order notification may be approximately the same in normal mode and CZ mode.

(39) In a game in which the AT mode is started or a game in which a lottery for switching to the AT mode is won may be configured to generate a freeze effect in which operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is disabled for a predetermined period of time. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined symbol combination is temporarily stopped on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 during the invalid period, and a notification is given that the AT mode is started or that a lottery for switching to the AT mode has been won. Then, after the predetermined symbol combination is temporarily stopped, each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is rotated again during the invalid period, and after the invalid period has elapsed, stop control corresponding to the lottery result of the game is performed based on the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44.

(40) In the first embodiment, the BB payout counter is set to not win the lottery for transition to the AT mode unless it is 7, but the lottery may be configured to win the lottery for transition to the AT mode even if the counter is a value other than 7 (e.g., 0 or 1). In this case, it is preferable to set the BB payout counter to have a higher probability of winning when it is 7 than when it is other than 7.

(41) The special information used in the advantageous zone transition process is not limited to one type, and multiple types of special information may be used. For example, a configuration may be used in which a transition AT mode transition lottery is performed using a BB game counter and a BB payout counter as special information, and if the BB game counter is less than a predetermined number (10) and the BB payout counter is equal to or greater than a specific number (30), the transition AT mode transition lottery is won or is more likely to be won, whereas if the BB game counter is equal to or greater than the predetermined number or the BB payout counter is less than the specific number, the transition AT mode transition lottery is less likely or less likely to be won than if the BB game counter is less than the predetermined number (10) and the BB payout counter is equal to or greater than the specific number (30).

(42) Instead of a configuration in which the AT mode is ended by transitioning to the BB state at the end of the AT mode, a configuration may be adopted in which a CZ mode or the like is set for a predetermined number of games (e.g., 5) after the number of remaining games in the AT mode reaches 0 and the AT mode ends, and if the BB state is achieved during the CZ mode, a push order notification occurs or is likely to occur in the first game of the BB state.

(43) The configuration may be such that the BB state is transitioned to in a situation close to the upper limit game number (1500) or the upper limit increase number (2400) of the favorable zone. In this case, for example, the configuration may be such that the BB state is transitioned to a predetermined number of games (e.g., 5) before the upper limit game number, or the BB state is transitioned to a predetermined number of coins (e.g., 10) before the upper limit increase number (2400). The above-mentioned predetermined number of games may be a number of games that can be played during the favorable zone, including at least a game that transitions to the BB state and a game that sets the BB payout counter as special information to a specific number (7). The above-mentioned predetermined number may also be a number of coins that can be played during the favorable zone, including at least a game that sets the BB payout counter as special information to a specific number (7), or a number at which the favorable zone ends when the BB payout counter is set to a specific number.

(44) The ball output rate is changed depending on each setting value, and setting 1 has the lowest ball output rate and setting 6 has the highest ball output rate. However, any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease or the manner of increase or decrease of ball output (game media) changes depending on the setting value. For example, the ball output rates of some setting values may be the same, such as setting 1 and setting 2 having the same ball output rate, and the ball output rates of other setting values may be different. Also, settings 1, 3, and 5 may have a high rate of increase or decrease in ball output, and settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low rate of increase or decrease in ball output. Also, settings 1 and 5 may increase the ball output by a predetermined amount in a short time and decrease the ball output by a predetermined amount in a long time, settings 2, 3, and 4 take a longer time to increase the predetermined amount than settings 1 and 5 and take a shorter time to decrease the predetermined amount than settings 1 and 5, and setting 6 hardly increases or decreases the ball output. In these cases, the ball output rates of each setting value may be the same.

(45) Although a slot machine having three reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel has been described, the present invention is not limited to this configuration and may be, for example, a slot machine having five reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel. From the viewpoint of preventing erroneous operations when stopping the reels, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Also, although a slot machine in which the number of active lines is set to one when the number of bets is three has been described, the present invention is not limited to this configuration and may be, for example, five active lines.

(46) Although a specific example of a slot machine 10 has been shown, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that combines a slot machine and a pachinko machine. In other words, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions of a slot machine, the present invention may be a gaming machine that has a ball insertion and ball payout function like a pachinko machine (a so-called ball-using reel gaming machine). If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only balls as gaming value, which can eliminate problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as gaming value, and restrictions on the location of gaming machines.

(47) In the above embodiment, an example was given of a gaming machine in which a game can be started by inserting medals as gaming media, setting the number of bets, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out as a bonus corresponding to winning the game. However, this does not deny medal-less gaming machines that do not use medals. In such medal-less gaming machines, for example, a configuration may be used in which a game can be started by setting the number of bets for a game using virtual gaming media (a predetermined gaming value), and virtual gaming media (a predetermined gaming value) corresponding to the predetermined number of medals is awarded as a bonus corresponding to winning the game. In this case, the number of virtual gaming media may be displayed on a predetermined display unit, or information corresponding to the number of virtual gaming media may be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

The above-mentioned pachinko machines may be not only pachinko machines that dispense game balls, but also sealed-in type pachinko machines in which game balls are not discharged outside the machine. In such sealed-in type pachinko machines, it is preferable to configure the machine to notify information indicating the number of winning balls, for example.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, while indicating effects, etc., as necessary. Note that in the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-mentioned embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses, etc.

The inventions shown in the following feature groups have been made with a problem to be solved by the invention, which is based on the background technology that "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a predetermined lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, in a slot machine, when a start lever is operated with medals as gaming media betted, an internal lottery is held and the reels start to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the reels stop corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus corresponding to the result is awarded (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The problem to be solved by the invention is that "In the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

<Features Group A>
Feature A1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, a first result is a possible winner, while when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second result is a possible winner that may provide a different benefit from the first result being a winner, or a result (push order bell) in which neither result is a winner is set;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the mode result, a mode notification means (a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification by the main control device 101, a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification performance by the display control device 81) capable of executing a mode notification including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means,
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the status notification by the status notification means is executable, and a normal state (normal section) in which the status notification by the status notification means is not executable are set,
A favorable transition means for transitioning from the normal state to the favorable state based on a predetermined favorable transition condition (a function for executing a process for transitioning to the favorable zone in the first process for displaying the zone by the main control device 101);
A favorable end means for transitioning from the favorable state to the normal state based on a predetermined favorable end condition (a function for executing a process for ending the favorable zone in the second process for displaying the zone by the main control device 101);
A specific processing execution means (a function of executing a processing at the time of transition to an advantageous zone by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific processing related to the status notification when a transition from the normal state to the advantageous state occurs due to the advantageous transition means;
Equipped with
A special result (first BB, second BB) that enables a transition to a special state advantageous to a player is set as a lottery result by the lottery means,
A special transition means (a function of executing a bonus state process by the main control device 101) for transitioning to the special state when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and a special pattern combination corresponding to the special result stops at the effective position;
A reserve means for reserving information corresponding to the fact that the special result has been won when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the special result and the special pattern combination has not stopped at the valid position (a function for allowing the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag by the main control device 101 to be carried over);
and a special information update means (a function of performing update processing of the RT counter, the BB payout counter, etc. by the main control device 101) for updating predetermined special information (such as a BB payout counter, an RT counter, etc.) in accordance with the progress of a special game including at least any game from a winning game in which the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result to an end game in which the special state ends,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific processing execution means is equipped with a special means (a function of executing processing when any BB state flag is set during processing by the main control unit 101 at the time of transition to the advantageous state) that can execute the specific processing using at least the special information when a transition to the advantageous state occurs by the advantageous transition means in the special state.

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result of the game started based on the operation of the start operation means is a pattern result, if the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first result will be won, and if it is operated in the second operation mode, the second result will be won or neither result will be won. Since a pattern notification including the first operation mode or the second operation mode may be executed, it is possible to realize a gameplay that greatly differs in the player's profit depending on whether or not the pattern notification is executed.

The status notification is executed in an advantageous state and is not executed in a normal state, and the advantageous state is more advantageous to the player. Furthermore, when transitioning to the advantageous state, specific processing related to the status notification is executed by the specific processing execution means. Therefore, in addition to transitioning to an advantageous state, it is possible to draw the player's interest in the content and results of the specific processing when transitioning to the advantageous state, and the level of attention when transitioning to the advantageous state is suitably increased.

In addition, a special result is set as the result of the lottery by the lottery means, which allows for a transition to a special state as a so-called bonus that is reserved if no winning is achieved in that game, and if a transition to an advantageous state occurs during that special state, a specific process related to status notification is executed using special information that changes according to the progress of the special game, including any game from when the special result is won until the special state ends, so that it is possible to realize unprecedented and innovative gameplay by linking the progress of the bonus to the specific process at the time of the transition to the advantageous state. This makes it possible to appropriately increase the attention paid to the game.

Feature A2. The gaming machine according to Feature A1, wherein the special information update means updates the special information regardless of whether the special information is used in the specific process.

The above configuration clarifies that the special information updated in special games such as special states is not information dedicated to specific processing related to status notification. In this way, when linking information on games such as games using status notification and special games such as special states, it becomes clear that these games are games proceeding completely separately, and the effect of increasing interest by linking the two games is enhanced.

Feature A3. The gaming machine according to Feature A1 or Feature A2, characterized in that the special information update means is capable of updating the special information in the normal state and is capable of updating the special information in the advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, the special information is updated regardless of whether or not the game is in an advantageous state in which the mode notification can be executed, and it is made clear that the special information is not exclusive to a specific process related to the mode notification. In this way, when linking game information such as a game using a mode notification and a special game such as a special state, it becomes clear that these games are games that proceed completely separately, and the effect of increasing interest by linking the two games is enhanced.

Feature A4. When the advantageous end means causes a transition from the advantageous state to the normal state, an initialization means (a function of executing initialization processing at the end of the advantageous period by the main control device 101) is provided that executes initialization processing of the advantageous information used in the advantageous state;
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A3, characterized in that the special information is not subject to the initialization processing by the initialization means.

When an advantageous state ends, the configuration is such that an initialization process is performed on the advantageous information used in that advantageous state, thereby ensuring the independence of each advantageous state, and making it possible to prevent the advantage/disadvantage from being passed on to a successor player when the game ends when the advantageous state ends. However, there are circumstances in which the game is interrupted every time an advantageous state ends due to the excessive guarantee of the independence of the advantageous state, which is undesirable in terms of increasing the interest of the game. Therefore, as in the above configuration, by performing specific processing when transitioning to an advantageous state using special information updated in special play such as a special state, rather than advantageous information used in the advantageous state, it is also possible to carry over information from the advantageous state that ended earlier as special information, and it is possible to increase the correlation between the earlier advantageous state and the later advantageous state.

Feature A5. A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, characterized in that it is equipped with a special advantageous ending means (a function for executing a process by the main control device 101 to end an advantageous zone in the first game of the BB state, etc.) capable of ending the advantageous state in a specific game (e.g., the first game of the BB state) among the special games prior to the ending game.

According to the above configuration, an advantageous state may end in a specific game during a special game in which the special information is updated. In that case, when the advantageous state ends and the player transitions to an advantageous state again, a specific process may be performed using special information in the special game that overlaps with the advantageous state before the end. With this configuration, it is possible to associate information between one advantageous state and a subsequent advantageous state using special information updated in a special game.

Feature A6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A5, characterized in that the result of the specific process is different when the special means executes the specific process using first special information as the special information and when the special means executes the specific process using second special information different from the first special information as the special information.

According to the above configuration, not only is the special information used in the specific process, but the result of the specific process differs depending on the type of special information used. In this way, the player's interest is drawn to the progress of the special game so that the special information used in the specific process becomes the desired special information. This makes it possible to increase the attention paid to the special game.

Feature A7. The gaming machine described in Feature A6, characterized in that when the result of the lottery by the lottery means in the special game is a first specific result, the special information update means updates the special information to the first special information, and when the result of the lottery by the lottery means in the special game is a second specific result different from the first specific result, the special information update means updates the special information to the second special information.

With the above configuration, the outcome of the subsequent specific processing will differ depending on the lottery result of the special game. This makes it possible to appropriately increase the attention to the special game.

Feature A8. A gaming machine according to Feature A6 or Feature A7, characterized in that when a first specific symbol combination stops at the valid position during the special game, the special information update means updates the special information to the first special information, and when a second specific symbol combination different from the first specific symbol combination stops at the valid position during the special game, the special information update means updates the special information to the second special information.

According to the above configuration, the result of the subsequent specific processing will differ depending on the result of stopping the special game. This makes it possible to appropriately increase the attention to the special game.

Feature A9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A6 to A8, characterized in that when a first specific benefit is awarded by the benefit awarding means in the special game, the special information update means updates the special information to the first special information, and when a second specific benefit different from the first specific benefit is awarded by the benefit awarding means in the special game, the special information update means updates the special information to the second special information.

According to the above configuration, the result of the subsequent specific process will differ depending on the bonus awarded in the special game. This makes it possible to appropriately increase the attention to the special game.

Feature A10. The gaming machine described in Feature A9, characterized in that when the result of the lottery by the lottery means in the special game is a first predetermined result (a push order bell win) and a pattern combination corresponding to the first predetermined result stops at the valid position, the first specific benefit is awarded by the benefit awarding means, and when the result of the lottery by the lottery means in the special game is a second predetermined result (a watermelon win) and a pattern combination corresponding to the second predetermined result stops at the valid position, the second specific benefit is awarded by the benefit awarding means.

According to the above configuration, the bonus awarded varies depending on the result of the special game lottery, and the result of the subsequent specific process varies depending on the bonus. This makes it possible to effectively increase the attention given to the special game.

Feature A11. The gaming machine described in Feature A9 or Feature A10, characterized in that when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the mode result and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, a pattern combination corresponding to the first result stops at the valid position and the first specific benefit is awarded by the benefit awarding means, and when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the mode result and the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, a pattern combination corresponding to the second result stops at the valid position and the second specific benefit is awarded by the benefit awarding means.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the updated special information is different between when the first specific benefit is awarded and when the second specific benefit is awarded, and this affects the result of the specific process, whether the first specific benefit or the second specific benefit is awarded depends on the operation mode of the stop operation means when the aspect result is selected. In this way, it is possible to attract great interest in the operation mode of the stop operation means when the aspect result is selected.

In particular, in this gaming machine, if the game that wins the status result is in an advantageous state, a status notification may be executed, so that, for example, it is possible to realize a game in which special information is adjusted by a status notification in one advantageous state, the advantageous state is terminated, and then the advantageous state is re-entered, and specific processing is performed using the adjusted special information. Therefore, it is possible to associate one advantageous state with a subsequent advantageous state while adjusting special information by the status notification.

Feature A12. A special advantageous end means (a function for executing a process for ending the advantageous zone by the main control device 101 in the first game of the BB state, etc.) capable of ending the advantageous state in a specific game (for example, the first game of the BB state) prior to the end game among the special games is provided;
The gaming machine described in feature A11 is characterized in that the mode notification means is equipped with a specific mode notification means (a function of executing processing to notify the push order, etc. in the first game of BB state by the main control unit 101 or the display control unit 81) that can execute the mode notification in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result before the advantageous state is ended by the special advantageous ending means.

According to the above configuration, when a mode result is won during a special state, whether to update the special information to the first special information by establishing the first result winning and obtaining a first specific benefit with that mode result, or to update the special information to the second special information by establishing the second result winning and obtaining a second specific result, can be adjusted by the mode notification at the time of winning the mode result. In addition, when the advantageous state ends in a specific game, if the special information is not further updated until the advantageous state transition, the first special information or the second special information is used to perform a specific process. With this configuration, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay property in which the result of the specific process at the time of the transition to the next advantageous state is adjusted using the mode notification during the previous advantageous state. This can increase the interest in the game.

Feature A13. As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (AT mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is likely to be executed, and a second advantageous state (normal mode or CZ mode) in which the mode notification is less likely to be executed than the first advantageous state are set;
The advantageous end means is configured to end the advantageous state and transition to the normal state when an end condition in the first advantageous state is satisfied, assuming that the advantageous end condition is satisfied, and
The special advantageous ending means is configured to end the advantageous state in the specific game regardless of whether or not an ending condition in the first advantageous state is established,
A gaming machine as described in feature A12, characterized in that the ease with which the specific mode notification means executes the mode notification differs between a case where the number of plays until the end of the first advantageous state is a first number of plays and a case where the number of plays is a second number of plays different from the first number of plays.

According to the above configuration, the execution rate of the mode notification by the specific mode notification means differs depending on the number of plays until the end of the first advantageous state, so that, for example, the configuration can be made such that the mode notification is more likely to be executed when there are only a few plays remaining until the end of the first advantageous state, or the configuration can be made such that the mode notification is more likely to be executed when there are still many plays remaining until the end of the first advantageous state, and the specific process can be performed with the special information adjusted by the mode notification, thereby making it possible to effectively adjust the degree of advantage of the advantageous state to be transitioned to. In this way, the special information provided to the specific process when re-transitioning to the advantageous state can be effectively managed depending on the degree of progress of the first advantageous state, which is advantageous to the player among the advantageous states.

Feature A14: The configuration is such that when the special means executes the specific process using the first special information as the special information, the result of the specific process is more likely to be advantageous to the player than when the special means executes the specific process using the second special information as the special information;
The gaming machine described in feature A13, characterized in that the specific mode notification means is configured to make it easier to execute the mode notification for the first operation mode the greater the number of games until the first advantageous state ends.

When the mode result is won, it is possible to establish the first result by operating the stop operation means in the first operation mode, and as a result, the special information is updated to the first special information. In this case, in the above configuration, the result of the specific process is more likely to be favorable when the first special information is used to execute the specific process than when the second special information is used, and the more games remaining in the first advantageous state, the more likely the specific mode notification means will notify the mode of the first operation mode. Therefore, even if there are many games remaining in the first advantageous state, the end of the advantageous state due to the special advantageous end means can be compensated for by the specific process at the time of the next transition to the advantageous state.

Feature A15: The configuration is such that when the special means executes the specific process using the first special information as the special information, the result of the specific process is more likely to be advantageous to the player than when the special means executes the specific process using the second special information as the special information;
The gaming machine described in feature A13 or feature A14, characterized in that the specific mode notification means is configured to make it easier to execute the mode notification for the first operation mode the fewer the number of games until the first advantageous state ends.

When the mode result is won, it is possible to achieve the first winning result by operating the stop operation means in the first operation mode, and as a result, the special information is updated to the first special information. In this case, the above configuration is configured so that when the specific process is executed using the first special information, the result of the specific process is more likely to be favorable than when the second special information is used, and the fewer the remaining plays in the first favorable state, the more likely it is that the specific mode notification means will notify the mode of the first operation mode.

Here, in order to obtain the benefit of updating the special information to the first special information by the specific mode notification means, it is necessary to at least win a special result or cause a transition to a special state. Therefore, in order to fully obtain the benefit of the first advantageous state and also to obtain an advantageous result in the specific processing at the time of the next transition to an advantageous state, the transition to the special state must occur as close as possible to the end of the first advantageous state, which makes it possible to significantly improve the playability as the first advantageous state is about to end.

Feature A16. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A13 to A15, characterized in that, when the reserving means reserves information corresponding to the winning of the special result, stopping the special pattern combination at the valid position is permitted in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result (a losing result), while stopping the special pattern combination at the valid position is restricted in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a result different from the special result.

According to the above configuration, for example, as in feature A15, in a configuration in which it is easier to enjoy the benefits of the specific mode notification means when the first advantageous state is about to end, it becomes desirable for the special result to occur as close to the end of the first advantageous state as possible. However, since there may be cases in which the first advantageous state ends without the special result, it is possible to favorably improve the playability when the first advantageous state is about to end. In addition, by configuring in such a way that the special result winning is limited unless a special result is obtained, it is possible to make it difficult for the special result winning to be realized unintentionally when the special result winning is reserved, and it is possible to make it difficult for an event to occur in which the advantageous state ends due to the special advantageous ending means even though there are many remaining plays, such as immediately after the start of the first advantageous state, as in feature A14.

Feature A17: Equipped with a bet amount setting means (credit insertion switches 56, 57) for setting the amount of bets on game value provided for a game;
The gaming machine described in feature A16 is characterized in that the lottery means is configured to conduct a lottery that is more advantageous to the player when a first bet number (3 bets) is set by the bet number setting means than when a second bet number (2 bets) different from the first bet number is set, and that the probability of obtaining the special result is higher when the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means than when the first bet number is set.

According to the above configuration, since a more favorable lottery can be obtained when the first bet number is set than when the second bet number is set, it is possible to relatively easily achieve a special result win by switching to the second bet number while assuming that the game is normally played with the first bet number. Therefore, it is possible to preferably avoid an event in which the first advantageous state ends without achieving a special result win.

Feature A18. The advantageous end means is configured to end the advantageous state and transition to the normal state when the number of games or the increase in the game value in the advantageous state reaches a predetermined upper limit number, assuming that the advantageous end condition is established;
A pre-emptive grasp means (a function for executing a remaining game number management process and a remaining coin number management process by the main control device 101) is provided for grasping that the upper limit number will be reached before the upper limit number is reached in the advantageous state,
The gaming machine described in any one of features A12 to A17, wherein the specific mode notification means is configured to more easily execute the mode notification when it is determined by the advance detection means that the upper limit number will be reached than when it is not determined that the upper limit number will be reached.

According to the above configuration, when the number of plays or the number of increases in the game value in the advantageous state reaches the upper limit, the advantageous state ends, making it possible to avoid situations where the advantageous state continues indefinitely or where too much game value is awarded in one advantageous state, and ensuring the soundness of the game. On the other hand, by setting such an upper limit on the advantageous state, for example, if it is recognized early that the upper limit will be reached, the game thereafter becomes a so-called waste game, and even though the advantageous state continues up to the upper limit, the level of attention to the game may decrease drastically. Therefore, as in the above configuration, when it is recognized in advance that the upper limit will be reached, it is made easier to notify the specific mode by the mode notification means, and it becomes possible to perform advantageous specific processing at the time of the next transition to the advantageous state by utilizing the benefit of the mode notification, and it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned decrease in attention.

Feature A19. A special advantageous ending means (a function for executing a process for ending the advantageous zone by the main control device 101 in the first game of the BB state, etc.) capable of ending the advantageous state in a specific game (for example, the first game of the BB state) prior to the end game among the special games is provided;
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (AT mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is likely to be executed, and a second advantageous state (normal mode or CZ mode) in which the mode notification is less likely to be executed than the first advantageous state are set,
The advantageous end means is configured to end the advantageous state and transition to the normal state when an end condition in the first advantageous state is established, assuming that the advantageous end condition is established, and
The special advantageous ending means is configured to end the advantageous state in the specific game regardless of whether or not an ending condition in the first advantageous state is established,
An increasing means for increasing the remaining number of games in the first advantageous state (a function for executing an adding process of the number of games in the AT mode by the main control device 101);
A means for executing a game number notification corresponding to the remaining game number in the first advantageous state (a function for executing a remaining game number display by the display control device 81);
When the remaining number of games in the first advantageous state is increased by the increasing means, an increase notification means (a function of executing a later-add notification by the display control device 81) is provided for executing an increase notification (later-add notification) corresponding to the increase in the remaining number of games after the notification of the number of games reaches a predetermined number,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A18, characterized in that it is equipped with a specific notification execution means (a function of executing a winning waiting effect by a display control device 81) that is capable of executing a specific notification (a winning waiting effect) corresponding to a situation in which a transition to the special state should occur when the number of remaining plays in the first advantageous state becomes a specific number (third specified number) that is less than the specified number.

According to the above configuration, when the number of remaining plays in the first advantageous state increases, an increase notification of the increase may be made when the reported number of remaining plays reaches a predetermined number, as a so-called later addition notification. Therefore, the timing of the increase in the number of remaining plays and the timing of the increase notification may differ, improving the playability of the first advantageous state. When the configuration of feature A1 is applied to such playability, there is a concern that even though an increase notification was scheduled to be made in the first advantageous state, a transition to a special state may occur and the advantageous state may end. In this regard, the above configuration is configured to notify that a transition to the special state is necessary after a specific number that is less than the predetermined number at which a later addition notification can be made is reached, so that it is possible to preferably avoid an event in which the advantageous state ends with a transition to the special state, even though there are still plays remaining for the later addition notification as described above.

The "specific number" can be, for example, "a number less than the number of plays that would be set upon transition to the first advantageous state," thereby ensuring the significance of ending the advantageous state by transitioning to the special state and causing a re-transition to the advantageous state.

Feature A20: The increase notification means is configured to, when the number of games increased by the increase means is a first number of games, execute the increase notification when the game number notification becomes a first predetermined number (11 games remaining) as the predetermined number, and, when the number of games increased by the increase means is a second number of games different from the first number of games, execute the increase notification when the game number notification becomes a second predetermined number (1 game remaining) that is smaller than the specific number;
A notification lottery means (a function of executing a notification lottery by the display control device 81 as to whether or not to execute a winning waiting performance) is provided for executing a notification lottery as to whether or not to execute the specific notification in a game after the game number notification has reached the specific number,
The gaming machine described in feature A19 is characterized in that the specific notification execution means is configured to execute the specific notification when it has not been determined that the increase notification will be made by the increase notification means and the result of the notification lottery by the notification lottery means is a result corresponding to executing the specific notification.

According to the above configuration, the timing of the execution of the increase notification as a later-addition notification varies depending on the number of plays increased by the increase means, and there are cases where the increase notification is made when the number of plays is less than the specific number at which the specific notification is made. The specific notification that should cause a transition to the special state is executed when no increase notification is made and when the notification lottery is won, so that it is possible to play in a situation where the number of plays is less than the specific number and no specific notification is made, while building up a sense of expectation that an increase notification may be made. Therefore, in a game in which a transition to a special state occurs during a first advantageous state to end the advantageous state, it is possible to appropriately increase interest in a scene where the number of remaining plays becomes small.

Feature A21. As the special state, a first special state (first BB state) and a second special state (second BB state) different from the first special state are set,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A20, characterized in that the special means is configured so that the result of the specific processing can be different when the specific processing is executed in the first special state and when the specific processing is executed in the second special state, even if the special information used is the same.

According to the above configuration, even if the special information is the same, the result of the specific process may differ depending on whether the special state when the specific process is executed is the first special state or the second special state. In this way, interest in which special result is won that causes a transition to which special state, or which special result is reserved, is heightened, and it is possible to improve the playability by utilizing the specific process when transitioning to an advantageous state.

The invention described in the above features A1 to A21 was made with a problem to be solved by the invention, which is based on the background technology that "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a predetermined lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, in a slot machine, when a start lever is operated with medals as a gaming medium betted, an internal lottery is held and the reels start to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the reels stop corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus corresponding to the result is awarded (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The problem is that "In the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

For each of the features A1 to A21 above, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the features A1 to A21, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D10, E1 to E11, F1 to F7, G1 to G10, and H1 to H12 individually, or to apply part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, a first result is a possible winner, while when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second result is a possible winner that may provide a different benefit from the first result being a winner, or a result (push order bell) in which neither result is a winner is set;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the mode result, a mode notification means (a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification by the main control device 101, a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification performance by the display control device 81) capable of executing a mode notification including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means,
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the status notification by the status notification means is executable, and a normal state (normal section) in which the status notification by the status notification means is not executable are set,
A favorable transition means for transitioning from the normal state to the favorable state based on a predetermined favorable transition condition (a function for executing a process for transitioning to the favorable zone in the first process for displaying the zone by the main control device 101);
A favorable end means for transitioning from the favorable state to the normal state based on a predetermined favorable end condition (a function for executing a process for ending the favorable zone in the second process for displaying the zone by the main control device 101);
When the advantageous transition means causes a transition from the normal state to the advantageous state, a specific processing execution means (a function of executing a processing at the time of transition to the advantageous zone by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific processing related to the status notification using predetermined special information (e.g., a BB payout counter);
When the game state is a first game state (BB state), the special information is allowed to be updated from the first special information (BB payout counter = 0) to the second special information (BB payout counter = 7), whereas when the game state is a second game state different from the first game state, the special information is restricted from being updated from the first special information to the second special information;
A gaming machine characterized in that the result of a specific process is set to be more advantageous to a player when the specific process is executed using the second special information than when the specific process is executed using the first special information.

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result of the game started based on the operation of the start operation means is a pattern result, if the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first result will be won, and if it is operated in the second operation mode, the second result will be won or neither result will be won. Since a pattern notification including the first operation mode or the second operation mode may be executed, it is possible to realize a gameplay that greatly differs in the player's profit depending on whether or not the pattern notification is executed.

The status notification is executed in an advantageous state and is not executed in a normal state, and the advantageous state is more advantageous to the player. Furthermore, when transitioning to the advantageous state, specific processing related to the status notification is executed by the specific processing execution means. Therefore, in addition to transitioning to an advantageous state, it is possible to draw the player's interest in the content and results of the specific processing when transitioning to the advantageous state, and the level of attention when transitioning to the advantageous state is suitably increased.

The special information used in the specific process may be updated from the first special information to the second special information, and the result of the specific process is set to be more advantageous to the player when the specific process is performed using the second special information than when the specific process is performed using the first special information. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to cause a transition to an advantageous state when the special information has been updated to the second special information.

And while updating from the first special information to the second special information is permitted in the first gaming state, it is restricted in the second gaming state, so it is more advantageous for the transition to the advantageous state to occur in the first gaming state. With this configuration, in a game that uses a status notification to cause a change in the degree of advantage, it is possible to draw attention not only to the transition to the advantageous state in which the status notification is executed, but also to the timing of the transition to the advantageous state, making it possible to realize gameplay that is more interesting than ever before.

In addition, by adopting the above configuration, there is no need to change the processing configuration of the specific process, such as using or not using special information depending on the game state, which simplifies the processing configuration and makes it possible to effectively prevent processing errors that occur when the processing configuration of the specific process is configured differently for each game state, as well as fraudulent activities that utilize such errors.

Feature B2. In the first gaming state, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined update result (for example, a push order bell), the first special information may be updated to the second special information,
A gaming machine as described in feature B1, characterized in that in the second gaming state, even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the update result, the first special information is not updated to the second special information.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature B1, and clarifies that even if the configuration is such that the information can be updated to the second special information if an update result is obtained in the first gaming state, the information will not be updated to the second special information even if the update result is obtained in the second gaming state. With this configuration, if the same update result is obtained, the first gaming state has a greater advantage, and it becomes possible to set a difference in the actual degree of advantage between the first gaming state and the second gaming state, for example, without making a difference in the probability of the update result or the benefit that results from it.

Feature B3. A gaming machine according to Feature B2, characterized in that the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means in the first gaming state will be the updated result (push order bell) is the same as the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means in the second gaming state will be the updated result.

The above configuration makes it possible to set a difference in the effective degree of advantage between the first and second game states without making the probability of winning the update result different between the two game states. Therefore, with a relatively simple configuration, it is possible to add variety to the game and increase the interest in the game.

Feature B4. The gaming machine described in Feature B2 or Feature B3, characterized in that the benefit provided by the benefit providing means when a pattern combination corresponding to the update result stops at the valid position in the first gaming state and the benefit provided by the benefit providing means when a pattern combination corresponding to the update result stops at the valid position in the second gaming state are the same.

The above configuration makes it possible to set a difference in the effective degree of advantage between the first and second game states without making the bonuses granted when an update result is won different between the two game states. This makes it possible to add variety to the game and increase interest in the game with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature B5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features B1 to B4, characterized in that it is provided with a means for updating the special information from the second special information to the first special information when a transition occurs from the first gaming state to the second gaming state (a function for executing a process for initializing a BB payout counter, etc., as a process for terminating the BB state in the bonus state process by the main control device 101).

According to the above configuration, even if the first special information is updated to the second special information during the first gaming state, if a transition to an advantageous state does not occur before the first gaming state ends, the second special information will be updated to the first special information. Therefore, in addition to updating to the second special information in the first gaming state, it is possible to give the player hope that a transition to an advantageous state will occur after the information is updated to the second special information and before the first gaming state ends, thereby making the game more interesting during the first gaming state.

Feature B6. In the first gaming state, the first special information is updated to the second special information based on a predetermined update opportunity (a push order bell win),
The gaming machine described in feature B5 is characterized in that the first gaming state is set to possibly end when the specified update trigger occurs.

According to the above configuration, in a game in which it is desired to update from the first special information to the second special information in the first gaming state, it is hoped that a specified update trigger will occur for the update to take place. On the other hand, since it is set up so that the first gaming state may end when the specified update trigger occurs, in order to perform a specific process using the second special information, when the specified update trigger occurs, not only is it necessary that the information be updated to the second special information, but also that the first gaming state does not end, making it possible to dramatically increase the level of attention when the specified update trigger occurs.

Feature B7. In the first gaming state, the first special information is updated to the second special information based on a predetermined update opportunity (a push order bell win),
A special advantageous end means (a function of executing a process of ending an advantageous period in the first game of the BB state by the main control device 101) capable of ending the advantageous state in a specific game in the first game state,
The gaming machine described in feature B5 or feature B6, wherein the special advantageous ending means is capable of ending the advantageous state when the specified renewal trigger occurs in the specific game, and is capable of ending the advantageous state when the specified renewal trigger does not occur in the specific game.

According to the above configuration, the advantageous state ends in a specific game during the first game state, and the advantageous state ends in the specific game regardless of whether the specific game is updated to the second special information. In this case, if the special information has not been updated when re-entering the advantageous state, it is more advantageous for the player if the advantageous state ends with the information being updated to the second special information than if the advantageous state ends without being updated. With this configuration, it is possible to favorably increase attention to the specific game in the first game state.

Feature B8. A special advantageous end means capable of ending the advantageous state in a specific game in the first gaming state (a function of executing a process to end the advantageous zone in the first game of the BB state by the main control device 101) is provided;
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B7, characterized in that the first gaming state can be continued even if the advantageous state is ended by the special advantageous ending means.

According to the above configuration, a transition to an advantageous state can occur during the first gaming state, and the first gaming state continues even when the advantageous state ends, making it clear that the advantageous state and the first gaming state are gaming states that proceed in parallel. In this configuration, by using special information updated during the first gaming state for specific processing at the time of the transition to the advantageous state, it becomes possible to effectively associate the advantageous state with the first gaming state.

Feature B9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features B1 to B8, characterized in that the first special information is an initial value of the special information.

According to the above configuration, in the first game state, the special information can be updated from the first special information as the initial value to the second special information, and in the second game state, the special information remains at its initial value. By configuring in this way, the configuration for holding the special information as the first special information in the second game state can be made relatively simple, and specifically, it is possible to store the special information at its initial value.

Feature B10. A storage means (various table storage area 105a) is provided for storing a special information group (such as a transition AT mode transition lottery table) in which at least the result of the specific processing when the first special information is used and the result of the specific processing when the second special information is used are stored as the special information;
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B9, characterized in that the specific processing execution means is configured to execute the specific processing using the special information and the special information group in the first gaming state, and to execute the specific processing using the special information and the special information group in the second gaming state.

According to the above configuration, the specific processing is executed using a so-called lottery table as a special information group in which the first special information corresponds to the result of the specific processing and the second special information corresponds to the result of the specific processing. In any game state, as long as the lottery table and the special information can be obtained, the specific processing can be executed with a common processing configuration. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration and suppress fraudulent activities.

The invention described in the above features B1 to B10 was made with a problem to be solved by the invention, which is based on the background technology that "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a predetermined lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, in a slot machine, when a start lever is operated with medals as a gaming medium betted, an internal lottery is held and the reels start to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the reels stop corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus corresponding to the result is awarded (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The problem is that "In the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

It is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of features A1 to A21, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F7, features G1 to G10, and features H1 to H12 individually to each of the configurations of features B1 to B10 above, or it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristics Group C>
Feature C1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, a first result is a possible winner, while when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second result is a possible winner that may provide a different benefit from the first result being a winner, or a result (push order bell) in which neither result is a winner is set;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the mode result, a mode notification means (a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification by the main control device 101, a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification performance by the display control device 81) capable of executing a mode notification including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means,
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the status notification by the status notification means is executable, and a normal state (normal section) in which the status notification by the status notification means is not executable are set,
A favorable transition means for transitioning from the normal state to the favorable state based on a predetermined favorable transition condition (a function for executing a process for transitioning to the favorable zone in the first zone display process by the main control device 101);
A favorable end means for transitioning from the favorable state to the normal state based on a predetermined favorable end condition (a function for executing a process for ending the favorable zone in the second process for displaying the zone by the main control device 101);
A specific processing execution means (a function of executing a processing at the time of transition to an advantageous zone by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific processing related to the status notification when a transition from the normal state to the advantageous state occurs due to the advantageous transition means;
Equipped with
The specific process execution means of the gaming machine is configured to execute the specific process in the game following the successful game in which the advantageous transition condition is met.

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result of the game started based on the operation of the start operation means is a pattern result, if the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first result will be won, and if it is operated in the second operation mode, the second result will be won or neither result will be won. Since a pattern notification including the first operation mode or the second operation mode may be executed, it is possible to realize a gameplay that greatly differs in the player's profit depending on whether or not the pattern notification is executed.

The status notification is executed in an advantageous state and is not executed in a normal state, and the advantageous state is more advantageous to the player. Furthermore, when transitioning to the advantageous state, specific processing related to the status notification is executed by the specific processing execution means. Therefore, in addition to transitioning to an advantageous state, it is possible to draw the player's interest in the content and results of the specific processing when transitioning to the advantageous state, and the level of attention when transitioning to the advantageous state is suitably increased.

Here, a transition to an advantageous state occurs when an advantageous transition condition is met, and the advantageous state ends when an advantageous end condition is met. In this case, for example, if the advantageous state ends in a game in which an advantageous end condition is met, and an advantageous transition condition is met in the next game, causing a transition to the advantageous state, doubts may arise as to whether the next game after the advantageous state ends is in an advantageous state or in a normal state. In other words, if a transition to an advantageous state occurs in a game in which an advantageous transition condition is met, the game becomes a game in an advantageous state, whereas the advantageous transition condition is met in a normal state, and therefore the game in which the advantageous transition condition is met can be interpreted as a game in an advantageous state, but can also be interpreted as a game in a normal state.

In this case, if a specific process related to the mode notification is executed in a game in which the advantageous transition condition is met, the specific process related to the mode notification can be interpreted as being executed during an advantageous state, or during a normal state. If the process related to the mode notification is executed in a normal state, there is a possibility that the significance of distinguishing between an advantageous state in which a mode notification can be executed and a normal state in which a mode notification cannot be executed will be lost.

Therefore, by configuring the specific processing related to the status notification executed when transitioning to the advantageous state as described above to be performed in the game following the game in which the advantageous transition condition is met, the specific processing is reliably performed in the game during the advantageous state, and it becomes possible to set the advantageous state when transitioning to the advantageous state while not losing the significance of the distinction between the advantageous state and the normal state.

Feature C2. Equipped with an advantageous judgment means (a function of executing an advantageous zone transition lottery process by the main control device 101) that executes a judgment of the establishment of the advantageous transition condition according to the lottery result by the lottery means,
The gaming machine described in feature C1 is characterized in that, when the advantageous determination means executes the establishment determination in the normal state, the number of cases in which it determines that the advantageous transition condition is established is greater than the number of cases in which it determines that the advantageous transition condition is not established.

In the above configuration, advantageous transition conditions are more likely to be met in the normal state, and concerns such as those described in Feature C1, such as transitioning from an advantageous state to the normal state and then achieving the advantageous transition conditions in the next game, are more likely to arise. Therefore, by applying the configuration of Feature C1 to such a configuration, it is possible to execute specific processing when transitioning to an advantageous state while not losing the significance of distinguishing between the advantageous state and the normal state.

The above configuration may also be expressed as "a gaming machine described in feature C1, which is characterized in that it is equipped with an advantage determination means (a function of executing an advantageous zone transition lottery process by the main control device 101) that executes a determination of whether the advantageous transition condition is established in accordance with the lottery result by the lottery means, and the advantage determination means always determines that the advantageous transition condition is established when the establishment determination is executed in the normal state."

Feature C3. Equipped with an advantageous judgment means (a function of executing an advantageous zone transition lottery process by the main control device 101) that executes a judgment of the establishment of the advantageous transition condition according to the lottery result by the lottery means,
The gaming machine described in feature C1 or feature C2, characterized in that the advantage determination means executes the establishment determination when the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result (push order bell) that is most likely to be won in the lottery by the lottery means.

In the above configuration, advantageous transition conditions are more likely to be met in the normal state, and concerns such as those described in Feature C1, such as transitioning from an advantageous state to the normal state and then achieving the advantageous transition conditions in the next game, are more likely to arise. Therefore, by applying the configuration of Feature C1 to such a configuration, it is possible to execute specific processing when transitioning to an advantageous state while not losing the significance of distinguishing between the advantageous state and the normal state.

Feature C4. As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (AT mode) in which the mode notification means is more likely to notify the player of the mode, and a second advantageous state (normal mode, CZ mode) in which the mode notification means is less likely to notify the player of the mode than the first advantageous state are set;
A transition determination means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) for executing a transition determination of transition from the second advantageous state to the first advantageous state in the advantageous state;
a first transition means for transitioning from the second advantageous state to the first advantageous state when the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means corresponds to transitioning to the first advantageous state (a function for executing a process for transitioning to the AT mode when the main control device 101 has been selected to transition to the AT mode);
a second transition means (a function of executing a process for transitioning to the AT mode based on the main control device 101 reaching the ceiling) for transitioning to the first advantageous state when the number of games played in the second advantageous state reaches a predetermined specific number of games, regardless of the result of the transition determination means or without making a transition determination by the transition determination means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C3, characterized in that the specific process execution means is configured to be capable of executing, as the specific process, at least a process of setting the specific number of games.

According to the above configuration, the specific process executed when transitioning to an advantageous state is at least a process of setting a specific number of games as the ceiling number of games. While setting such a ceiling number of games is a process that should be executed as early as possible when transitioning to an advantageous state, if the ceiling number of games is set in play in the normal state before the transition to the advantageous state, the degree of advantage in the normal state will differ greatly depending on the ceiling number of games, which is undesirable. Therefore, by configuring such processing to be performed in a specific process and configuring the specific process to be executed in the next play after the advantageous transition condition is met, it is possible to configure the ceiling number of games to be set in play after a reliable transition to an advantageous state and in the shortest play possible.

Feature C5. As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (AT mode) in which the mode notification means is more likely to notify the player of the mode, and a second advantageous state (normal mode, CZ mode) in which the mode notification means is less likely to notify the player of the mode than the first advantageous state are set;
A transition determination means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) for executing a transition determination of a transition from the second advantageous state to the first advantageous state in the advantageous state;
a first transition means for transitioning from the second advantageous state to the first advantageous state when the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means corresponds to transitioning to the first advantageous state (a function for executing a process for transitioning to the AT mode when the main control device 101 has been selected to transition to the AT mode);
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C4, characterized in that the specific processing execution means is configured to be capable of executing, as the specific processing, at least a process for determining a transition to the first advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, in the specific processing executed when transitioning to the advantageous state, at least a transition judgment to the first advantageous state can be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to start the advantageous state from the first advantageous state, and it is possible to increase the attention to the game transitioning to the advantageous state. By executing such a transition judgment to the first advantageous state as early as possible when transitioning to the advantageous state, it is possible to strengthen the impression that the advantageous state has started in the first advantageous state, while if the transition judgment is executed in the game in the normal state before the transition to the advantageous state, the advantage in the normal state will differ greatly depending on the result of the transition judgment, which is not preferable. Therefore, by configuring such processing to be executed in the specific processing and configuring the specific processing to be executed in the game next to the establishment of the advantageous transition condition, it is possible to configure the transition judgment to the first advantageous state to be executed in the game after the transition to the advantageous state is surely made and in the shortest game.

Feature C6. The gaming machine according to any one of Features C1 to C5, characterized in that the specific process execution means is configured to execute the specific process when the start operation means is operated in a game following a game in which the advantageous transition condition is established.

According to the above configuration, the specific process is executed at the start of the game following the game in which the advantageous transition condition is met, so that the transition to the advantageous state occurs reliably and the specific process is executed at the shortest possible time. In this way, it is possible to optimally set various settings for the transition to the advantageous state.

Feature C7: In a game in which the advantageous transition condition is established, a storage means (a function of executing a process of setting an advantageous zone flag by the main control device 101) is provided for storing advantageous information corresponding to the advantageous state in a predetermined storage area;
The gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C6, characterized in that the mode notification means is configured to be able to execute the mode notification in a game in which the start operation means is operated when the advantageous information is stored, and to be unable to execute the mode notification in a game in which the start operation means is operated when the advantageous information is not stored.

According to the above configuration, advantageous information is stored in a game in which an advantageous transition condition is met, and it is made clear that the next game and onwards are advantageous states in which mode notification can be executed. In other words, in a game in which an advantageous transition condition is met, advantageous information is not stored at the start of that game, so mode notification cannot be executed and the normal state is reached. By applying the configuration of feature C1 above to this configuration, it is made clearer that the specific process is executed in an advantageous state rather than in the normal state.

Feature C8. The advantageous transition condition may be satisfied when the start operating means is operated,
The gaming machine described in feature C7 is characterized in that the storage means performs processing to store the advantageous information when the advantageous transition condition is established.

According to the above configuration, the advantageous transition condition can be established when the start operating means is operated, and advantageous information is stored when the advantageous transition condition is established. This configuration makes it possible to interpret a game in which the advantageous information is stored as being in an advantageous state, which enhances the significance of executing a specific process in the next game, as in feature C1.

Feature C9. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, a first result is a possible winner, while when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second result is a possible winner that may provide a different benefit from the first result being a winner, or a result (push order bell) in which neither result is a winner is set;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the mode result, a mode notification means (a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification by the main control device 101, a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification performance by the display control device 81) capable of executing a mode notification including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means,
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the status notification by the status notification means is executable, and a normal state (normal section) in which the status notification by the status notification means is not executable are set,
A favorable transition means for transitioning from the normal state to the favorable state based on a predetermined favorable transition condition (a function for executing a process for transitioning to the favorable zone in the first process for displaying the zone by the main control device 101);
A favorable end means for transitioning from the favorable state to the normal state based on a predetermined favorable end condition (a function for executing a process for ending the favorable zone in the second process for displaying the zone by the main control device 101);
A specific processing execution means (a function of executing a processing at the time of transition to an advantageous zone by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific processing related to the status notification when a transition from the normal state to the advantageous state occurs due to the advantageous transition means;
Equipped with
The specific process execution means is configured to execute the specific process when a completed game in which the advantageous transition condition is met is terminated.

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result of the game started based on the operation of the start operation means is a pattern result, if the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first result will be won, and if it is operated in the second operation mode, the second result will be won or neither result will be won. Since a pattern notification including the first operation mode or the second operation mode may be executed, it is possible to realize a gameplay that greatly differs in the player's profit depending on whether or not the pattern notification is executed.

The status notification is executed in an advantageous state and is not executed in a normal state, and the advantageous state is more advantageous to the player, and furthermore, when transitioning to the advantageous state, a specific process related to the status notification is executed by the specific process execution means, so in addition to transitioning to an advantageous state, it is possible to draw the player's interest to the content and results of the specific process when transitioning to the advantageous state, and the level of attention when transitioning to the advantageous state is suitably increased.

Here, a transition to an advantageous state occurs when an advantageous transition condition is met, and the advantageous state ends when an advantageous end condition is met. In this case, for example, if the advantageous state ends in a game in which an advantageous end condition is met, and an advantageous transition condition is met in the next game, causing a transition to the advantageous state, doubts may arise as to whether the next game after the advantageous state ends is in an advantageous state or in a normal state. In other words, if a transition to an advantageous state occurs in a game in which an advantageous transition condition is met, the game becomes a game in an advantageous state, whereas the advantageous transition condition is met in a normal state, and therefore the game in which the advantageous transition condition is met can be interpreted as a game in an advantageous state, but can also be interpreted as a game in a normal state.

In this case, if a specific process related to the status notification is executed at the start of a game when the advantageous transition condition is met, it can be interpreted that the specific process related to the status notification is executed before the transition to the advantageous state. In that case, there is a possibility that the significance of distinguishing between an advantageous state in which a status notification can be executed and a normal state in which a status notification cannot be executed will be lost.

Therefore, as in the above configuration, by configuring the specific process related to the status notification executed when transitioning to an advantageous state to be executed when the game in which the advantageous transition condition is met is terminated, even if the game itself in which the specific process is executed is in a normal state, if the next game is in an advantageous state, it is possible to reflect the result of the specific process in the game in which the advantageous state is achieved, and it is possible to set the advantageous state when transitioning to the advantageous state without losing the significance of distinguishing between the advantageous state and the normal state.

Note that, for feature C9, the configurations defined by features C1 to C8 may be applied individually or in combination, and some of the configurations defined by features C1 to C8 may be applied individually or in combination.

The invention described in the above features C1 to C9 was made with a problem to be solved by the invention, which is based on the background technology that "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a predetermined lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, in a slot machine, when a start lever is operated with medals as a gaming medium betted, an internal lottery is held and the reels start to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the reels stop corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus corresponding to the result is awarded (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The problem is that "In the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

The technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of features A1 to A21, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F7, features G1 to G10, and features H1 to H12 can be applied individually to each of the configurations of features C1 to C9 above, or part or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, a first result is a possible winner, while when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second result is a possible winner that may provide a different benefit from the first result being a winner, or a result (push order bell) in which neither result is a winner is set;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the mode result, a mode notification means (a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification by the main control device 101, a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification performance by the display control device 81) capable of executing a mode notification including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means,
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the status notification by the status notification means is executable, and a normal state (normal section) in which the status notification by the status notification means is not executable are set,
A favorable transition means for transitioning from the normal state to the favorable state based on a predetermined favorable transition condition (a function for executing a process for transitioning to the favorable zone in the first process for displaying the zone by the main control device 101);
A favorable end means for transitioning from the favorable state to the normal state based on a predetermined favorable end condition (a function for executing a process for ending the favorable zone in the second process for displaying the zone by the main control device 101);
Equipped with
A special result (first BB, second BB) that enables a transition to a special state advantageous to a player is set as a lottery result by the lottery means,
A special transition means (a function of executing a bonus state process by the main control device 101) for transitioning to the special state when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and a special pattern combination corresponding to the special result stops at the effective position;
A reserve means for reserving information corresponding to the fact that the special result has been won when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the special result and the special pattern combination has not stopped at the valid position (a function for allowing the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag by the main control device 101 to be carried over);
A reserved number grasping means for grasping the number of games played while the information corresponding to the winning of the special result is reserved by the reserving means (a function for executing an update process of the RT game counter in the bonus state process by the main control device 101);
A specific setting means for setting the degree of advantage of the advantageous state to which the special state is to be transitioned in accordance with the number of games that are grasped by the reserved number grasping means when the advantageous transition condition is established in the special state (a function for executing a lottery process for transitioning to an AT mode at the time of transition according to the RT game counter in the advantageous zone transition process by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result of the game started based on the operation of the start operation means is a pattern result, if the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first result will be won, and if it is operated in the second operation mode, the second result will be won or neither result will be won. Since a pattern notification including the first operation mode or the second operation mode may be executed, it is possible to realize a gameplay that greatly differs in the player's profit depending on whether or not the pattern notification is executed.

In addition, as a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a special result is set that allows a transition to a special state as a so-called bonus that is reserved if no winning is achieved in that game, and if a transition to an advantageous state occurs during that special state, the degree of advantage of that advantageous state is set according to the number of plays from when the special result is won until the transition to the special state occurs. With this configuration, it is possible to realize a gameplay in which, when a bonus is won, the game that establishes a bonus win is adjusted in order to favorably progress the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to realize an unprecedented and innovative gameplay by associating a game that utilizes a special state as a so-called bonus state with a game that utilizes a mode notification according to the number of plays from when the bonus is won until a winning is achieved.

Feature D2. The gaming machine described in Feature D1, characterized in that the specific setting means sets the advantageous state to which the player is to be transitioned to more advantageously the smaller the number of games grasped by the reserved number grasping means.

According to the above configuration, the fewer the number of games required from winning the special result to achieving the special result prize, the more advantageous the special state based on the special result prize can be set. In this way, attention to each game is appropriately increased so that the special result prize is not overlooked, and careful operation of the stop operation means is required to achieve the special result prize when the special result is won. Furthermore, if the special result prize can be achieved earlier, interest in achieving the advantageous transition conditions in the special state is increased, and the enjoyment of the game during the special state is improved.

Feature D3. The specific setting means is configured to set the advantageous state to be transitioned to more favorably when the number of games grasped by the reserved number grasping means is less than a specific number (1) than when the number is equal to or greater than the specific number, and when the number of games grasped by the reserved number grasping means is equal to or greater than the specific number, the more advantageous the advantageous state to be transitioned to can be set to the greater the number of games grasped.

According to the above configuration, if the player succeeds in winning the special result before playing a specific number of times after winning the special result, the player is set to a more advantageous state than if the player won the specific number of times or more. On the other hand, if the player is unable to win the special result before playing a specific number of times, the player is set to a more advantageous state the more times the player plays until the special result is won. In this way, it is possible to appropriately increase the attention paid to the game from winning the special result until playing a specific number of times, and it is possible to realize a gameplay that allows the player to determine the timing of the special result win in relation to the advantageous state being set for subsequent games.

Feature D4. The gaming machine described in Feature D3, wherein the specific number is 1.

According to the above configuration, if the player succeeds in winning the special result in a game that wins the special result, the player is set to a favorable advantageous state, but thereafter, the more games that are reserved, the more favorable the advantageous state that is set. By doing this, the importance of determining whether to win the special result or winning increases, improving the gameplay.

Feature D5. At least a first special result (first BB) and a second special result (second BB) are set as the special result;
the special transition means transitions the special state to a first special state when a first special pattern combination corresponding to the first special result is stopped at the activated position, and transitions the special state to a second special state when a second special pattern combination corresponding to the second special result is stopped at the activated position;
The gaming machine described in feature D4, wherein each of the pictures of the first special pattern combination and the second special pattern combination is set so that if the stop operation means is operated at a timing that allows the first special pattern combination to be stopped, the second special pattern combination cannot be stopped, and if the stop operation means is operated at a timing that allows the second special pattern combination to be stopped, the first special pattern combination cannot be stopped.

According to the above configuration, in a game in which winning a special result is advantageous, as in feature D4, if the first special result is aimed for, the second special result cannot be achieved, and if the second special result is aimed for, the first special result cannot be achieved. Therefore, even if it is possible to determine that one of the special results has been won, if it is not possible to determine which special result has been won, the corresponding special result cannot be achieved. This makes it possible to make more careful judgments about which special result has been won and to perform stopping operations, and it is also possible to realize a game in which the player can win a prize by relying on his or her own intuition even if he or she is unable to determine which special result has been won.

Feature D6. When the number of games played in the advantageous state reaches a predetermined upper limit, an upper limit termination means (a function of executing a process for terminating the advantageous zone when the upper limit game number is reached by the main control device 101) is provided to terminate the advantageous state;
A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D5, characterized in that when the number of plays grasped by the reserved number grasping means is equal to or greater than the upper limit number, the specific setting means is capable of setting the advantageous state to a more advantageous state than when the number is less than the upper limit number.

As in the above configuration, by configuring the special state so that it is possible to reserve more than the upper limit number of plays of the advantageous state, it is made clear that the special state and the advantageous state are states that proceed in parallel. Moreover, with the above configuration, when the advantageous state is reserved for more than the upper limit number of plays, it is set to a more advantageous state than when it is less than the upper limit number of plays. Therefore, for example, when an advantageous state ends because the upper limit number of plays has been reached, the disappointment that accompanies the end can be effectively addressed by the degree of advantage of the advantageous state to which it is re-transitioned.

Feature D7. A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, characterized in that the predetermined advantageous end condition is set to be established in a predetermined specific game in the special state, and the specific setting means sets the degree of advantage of the advantageous state to which the game is transitioned when the predetermined advantageous transition condition is established in a game subsequent to the specific game.

According to the above configuration, the advantageous state in which the degree of advantage is set by the specific setting means is an advantageous state in which the advantageous state ends once during the special state and then transitions thereto. With this configuration, it is possible to allow play in a state in which a special result win is reserved to be involved in setting the degree of advantage of the advantageous state by the specific setting means, while allowing play in the reserved state to be played in an advantageous state. Therefore, for example, even in a game in which the more times the state is played, as in feature D3, the more advantageous the state can be set to, the less likely play in that state will be a waste of time.

Feature D8. As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (AT mode) in which the mode notification means is more likely to notify the player of the mode, and a second advantageous state (normal mode, CZ mode) in which the mode notification means is less likely to notify the player of the mode than the first advantageous state are set;
The gaming machine described in feature D7 is characterized in that the specific setting means is configured to make it easier to set the advantageous state to the first advantageous state when the special state is transitioned to from the first advantageous state, while when the special state is transitioned to from the second advantageous state, the advantageous state is not set to the first advantageous state or is more difficult to set to the first advantageous state than when the special state is transitioned to from the first advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, when a transition to the special state occurs in the first advantageous state where a status notification is likely to occur, the advantageous state ends once, but the advantageous state to which the player transitions again is likely to be set to the first advantageous state. For example, if the number of plays in the first advantageous state is set, the first advantageous state can be reset by transitioning to the special state during the first advantageous state, and the number of plays can be essentially increased. Furthermore, since the number of plays after the special result is won is related to the degree of advantage of the advantageous state, not only is a transition to the special state simply caused during the first advantageous state, but transitioning to the special state can be advantageous or disadvantageous depending on the number of plays after winning, making it possible to realize an interesting gameplay that associates the first advantageous state with the special state.

Feature D9. When a predetermined end condition is satisfied in the special state, a special end means (a function of executing a process for ending the BB state in the bonus state process by the main control device 101) is provided to end the special state;
A gaming machine described in feature D8, characterized in that the specified termination condition can be met even in the first advantageous state.

The above configuration makes it clear that the special state can end during the first advantageous state. With this configuration, if a transition to the special state occurs during the first advantageous state and the first advantageous state is reset, it may be possible to cause a transition to the special state again during the first advantageous state. This makes it possible to realize gameplay in which a game in which the first advantageous state is reset by transitioning to the special state during the first advantageous state can be repeatedly played.

Feature D10. The gaming machine described in Feature D9, characterized in that the advantageous end condition in the first advantageous state set by the specific setting means is set to be satisfied after the specified end condition of the special state that triggered the setting of the first advantageous state is satisfied.

According to the above configuration, if a transition to a special state occurs during the first advantageous state, and the first advantageous state is reset based on that transition, the reset first advantageous state will continue longer than the special state that triggered the reset. If the special state ends during the reset first advantageous state, and then a special result is won, allowing a transition to the special state, it will be possible to reset to the first advantageous state according to the number of reserved prizes. In this way, it is possible to optimally achieve gameplay that allows the first advantageous state to be reset repeatedly.

The invention described in the above features D1 to D10 was made with a problem to be solved by the invention, which is based on the background technology that "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a predetermined lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, in a slot machine, when a start lever is operated with medals as a gaming medium betted, an internal lottery is held and the reels start to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the reels stop corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus corresponding to the result is awarded (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The problem is that "In the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

It is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of features A1 to A21, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F7, features G1 to G10, and features H1 to H12 individually to each of the configurations of features D1 to D10 above, or it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Features Group E>
Feature E1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, a first result is a possible winner, while when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second result is a possible winner that may provide a different benefit from the first result being a winner, or a result (push order bell) in which neither result is a winner is set;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the mode result, a mode notification means (a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification by the main control device 101, a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification performance by the display control device 81) capable of executing a mode notification including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means,
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the status notification by the status notification means is executable, and a normal state (normal section) in which the status notification by the status notification means is not executable are set,
A favorable transition means for transitioning from the normal state to the favorable state based on a predetermined favorable transition condition (a function for executing a process for transitioning to the favorable zone in the first process for displaying the zone by the main control device 101);
A favorable end means for transitioning from the favorable state to the normal state based on a predetermined favorable end condition (a function for executing a process for ending the favorable zone in the second process for displaying the zone by the main control device 101);
An end determination means for determining whether the advantageous end condition is satisfied (a function for executing a determination as to whether or not to perform processing for the advantageous zone end in the second zone display processing by the main control device 101);
Equipped with
The end determination means
In the advantageous state, when a first specific operation (a BB winning) and a second specific operation (for example, a stop operation corresponding to a first minor winning when a push order bell is won) are performed by the player, it is determined that the predetermined advantageous end condition is established,
In the advantageous state, if the player performs the first specific operation but performs a third specific operation different from the second specific operation (for example, a stop operation that does not correspond to the first minor role winning when the push order bell is won), it is determined that the predetermined advantageous end condition is not established.
A storage means for storing specific information corresponding to the first specific operation and the third specific operation performed by a player (a function for executing a process for setting a specific flag by the main control device 101);
When the first specific operation and the second specific operation are performed by a player and the specific information is stored, a restriction means for restricting the end determination means from determining that a predetermined advantageous end condition has been established, or restricting the establishment of the predetermined advantageous end condition (a function for executing a process for preventing the execution of a process for the end of an advantageous period when a specific flag is set by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result of the game started based on the operation of the start operation means is a pattern result, if the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first result will be won, and if it is operated in the second operation mode, the second result will be won or neither result will be won. Since a pattern notification including the first operation mode or the second operation mode may be executed, it is possible to realize a gameplay that greatly differs in the player's profit depending on whether or not the pattern notification is executed.

Because this mode notification can be performed in an advantageous state but cannot be performed in a normal state, it is thought that the player will expect the game state to transition to an advantageous state rather than the normal state. However, if the continuity of the advantageous state that has been transitioned to is entirely up to the gaming machine, the so-called thrill of a slot machine, in which a game starts based on the player's start operation and ends based on the player's stop operation, may be lost, and the entertainment value of the game may be reduced. Therefore, in the above configuration, if the player performs the first specific operation and the second specific operation during an advantageous state, the advantageous state ends as the advantageous end condition is met, allowing the player to be involved in the continuity of the advantageous state, making it possible to increase the entertainment value of the game during the advantageous state.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the advantageous state does not end simply when the first specific operation is performed during the advantageous state, but ends when the second specific operation is performed in conjunction with it. Therefore, for example, if the first specific operation is performed, it is possible to avoid the end of the advantageous state by having the third specific operation performed instead of the second specific operation, allowing the player to fully enjoy wondering whether the advantageous state will end based on their operation.

Furthermore, when the end of the advantageous state is avoided by the third specific operation, specific information is stored, and in a situation where that specific information is stored, the advantageous state will not end even if the first specific operation and the second specific operation are subsequently performed. In this way, once the end of the advantageous state is avoided by performing the third specific operation, it is possible to avoid the end of the advantageous state based on the player's operation as long as the specific information is stored. Therefore, when the first specific operation is performed, more careful operation is encouraged as to whether to perform the second specific operation or the third specific operation, and interest in games in which an advantageous state may end based on the player's operation is increased.

Furthermore, for example, immediately after transitioning to an advantageous state, the state may be relatively advantageous, but the degree of advantage may decrease thereafter, and it may be beneficial for the player to intentionally end the advantageous state and transition back to the advantageous state. By using the above configuration for such a gaming machine, it is possible to allow the player to transition back to the advantageous state (end the advantageous state) by themselves, but if, after performing the first specific operation, the player performs the third specific operation instead of the second specific operation, the chance of transitioning back is limited as long as the specific information is stored. Therefore, even with this configuration, when the first specific operation is performed, more careful operation is encouraged as to whether to perform the second specific operation or the third specific operation, and the interest of the game in which the advantageous state may end based on the player's operation is increased.

Feature E2. A gaming machine according to Feature E1, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function for executing a process to clear a specific flag by the main control device 101) capable of erasing the specific information when a predetermined specific condition (when an advantageous period ends or when 100 games have elapsed since a specific flag was set) is met.

According to the above configuration, the period during which the end of an advantageous state based on the player's operation is restricted is limited. In this case, if the gameplay does not allow the advantageous state to end, the player will hope that the specific condition will not be met, and if the gameplay has merit in ending the advantageous state, the player will hope that the specific condition will be met, and the interest in the game will be increased depending on whether the specific condition is met or not.

Feature E3. The gaming machine described in Feature E2, characterized in that the specific condition is not met until the end determination means determines that a specific advantageous end condition (end of AT mode or reaching of upper limit) has been met that is different from the predetermined advantageous end condition that is determined to be met when the first specific operation and the second specific operation are performed.

According to the above configuration, the specific condition is not satisfied and the specific information is not erased until the advantageous state ends based on the satisfaction of another advantageous ending condition, not the end of the advantageous state based on the player's operation. In other words, once the first specific operation and the third specific operation are performed in one advantageous state and the specific information is stored, the advantageous state will not end even if the first specific operation and the second specific operation are performed until the advantageous state ends. In this way, the merits of the player are increased in the gameplay in which the player wants to continue the advantageous state, and the player who wants to re-transition the advantageous state has only one chance to re-transition in one advantageous state. Therefore, the attention to the game when the second specific operation and the third specific operation are performed is dramatically increased.

Feature E4: When the advantageous transition means causes a transition from the normal state to the advantageous state, a specific processing execution means (a function of executing a processing at the time of transition to an advantageous zone by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific processing related to the status notification is provided;
A gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that the specific processing can be performed to cause a specific event advantageous to the player (e.g., winning the AT mode transition or setting the ceiling game number to 0) to occur.

According to the above configuration, if an advantageous state is terminated and then re-transitioned to an advantageous state, a specific process is performed and a specific event that is advantageous to the player may occur, making it a configuration in which there is an advantage to re-transitioning the advantageous state. By applying such a configuration to feature E1, it is possible to provide a chance to re-transition, but make it a limited one, thereby increasing attention to the chance to re-transition.

Feature E5. As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (AT mode) in which the mode notification means is more likely to notify the player of the mode, and a second advantageous state (normal mode, CZ mode) in which the mode notification means is less likely to notify the player of the mode than the first advantageous state are set;
A gaming machine described in feature E4, characterized in that the specific event is a transition to the first advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, when the advantageous state is ended by the first specific operation and the second specific operation and the advantageous state is re-transitioned, a transition to the first advantageous state can occur. In this way, in order to cause a transition to the first advantageous state in an advantageous state, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay property in which the advantageous state is temporarily ended, making it easier to transition to the first advantageous state. Therefore, for example, in a configuration in which an upper limit is set on the number of times that an advantageous state continues, it is possible to temporarily reset the number of times that the advantageous state continues when transitioning to the first advantageous state, allowing the player to enjoy maximum benefits in the first advantageous state to which the transition is made.

Feature E6. A grasping means (number of games in an advantageous zone AG, number of coins increased or decreased in an advantageous zone MY) is provided for grasping at least one of the number of games in the advantageous state and the increase in the game value in the advantageous state;
The end determination means determines that the advantageous end condition is established when at least one of the number of games and the increased number grasped by the grasping means reaches a predetermined upper limit number,
A gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E5, characterized in that when the advantageous state is ended by the advantageous ending means, it is equipped with a means for executing initialization processing of at least one of the number of plays and the increased number grasped by the grasping means (a function for executing initialization processing of advantageous zone information by the main control unit 101).

According to the above configuration, for example, the advantageous state is ended by the first specific operation and the second specific operation, and the number of plays and the increased number are initialized. In this way, it is possible to end the advantageous state by one's own operation before the upper limit number is reached, and for example, in a configuration in which a transition to the first advantageous state occurs by ending the advantageous state, as in feature E5, it is possible to transition to the first advantageous state in a state in which it is possible to play up to the upper limit number.

Feature E7. The gaming machine according to any one of Features E1 to E6, characterized in that when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined corresponding result and the stop operation means is operated by the second specific operation, a picture combination corresponding to the corresponding result stops at the valid position, and when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the corresponding result and the stop operation means is operated by the third specific operation, the picture combination corresponding to the corresponding result does not stop at the valid position, or a picture combination corresponding to a result different from the corresponding result stops at the valid position.

According to the above configuration, the second specific operation and the third specific operation are an operation that establishes the corresponding result winning when the corresponding result is won, and an operation that does not establish the corresponding result winning, which is the third specific operation. With this configuration, if the advantageous state is ended, the corresponding result winning is established, and if it is not ended, the corresponding result winning is not established. This matches the thrill of slot machines, in which a player obtains a bonus by establishing a winning result with their own stopping operation, and makes the gameplay more acceptable to players. It also makes it possible to determine whether the advantageous state will end based on the combination of pictures stopped in the valid position, making the gameplay easier to understand.

Feature E8. The corresponding result is the behavior result;
The second specific operation is to operate the stop operation means in the first operation mode,
The gaming machine described in feature E7, wherein the third specific operation is to operate the stop operation means in the second operation mode.

According to the above configuration, in order to end the advantageous state in which the mode notification can be executed when the mode result is won, it is sufficient to perform an operation to establish the first result win when the mode result is won, and the advantageous state will not end if an operation such as establishing the second result win is performed when the mode result is won. In this way, the operation to end the advantageous state and the operation to receive the benefits during the advantageous state are shared, making it possible to realize unexpected gameplay in which the advantageous state ends while receiving the benefits during the advantageous state.

Feature E9. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a special result (first BB, second BB) that enables a transition to a special state advantageous to the player is set;
A special transition means (a function of executing a bonus state process by the main control device 101) for transitioning a gaming state to the special state when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the special result and a special pattern combination corresponding to the special result stops at the effective position;
A reserve means (a function of executing a process of carrying over a first BB winning flag or a second BB winning flag by the main control device 101) capable of retaining information corresponding to the winning of the special result when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the special pattern combination does not stop at the valid position;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E8, characterized in that the first specific operation is to operate the stop operation means so that the special pattern combination stops at the valid position when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, or when information corresponding to winning the special result is reserved by the reservation means.

According to the above configuration, the first specific operation is an operation for winning a special result as a so-called bonus. In other words, when a special result is won in an advantageous state, performing the second specific operation ends the advantageous state, and performing the third specific operation does not end the advantageous state. Furthermore, when the third specific operation is performed, the advantageous state does not end even if the special result is won and the second specific operation is performed thereafter. With this configuration, there are cases where the advantageous state ends by transitioning to the bonus state, and cases where the advantageous state does not end even if the advantageous state is transitioned to the bonus state, making it possible to play both games, which can proceed in parallel, such as the bonus state and the advantageous state, while associating them. This makes it possible to appropriately improve the interest of the game.

Feature E10. The gaming machine described in Feature E9 is configured to perform either the second specific operation or the third specific operation in a specific game that is a game that occurs after the transition to the special state and before the special state ends.

According to the above configuration, a transition to a special state occurs by performing a first specific operation, and a second specific operation or a third specific operation is performed in a specific game during the special state. With this configuration, after transitioning to a so-called bonus state, it becomes possible to play a game in which the player not only receives the benefits of the bonus state, but also decides by his own operation whether or not to end the advantageous state.

Furthermore, in the above configuration, the specific game is at least a game played before the special state ends. This leaves room for the realization of gameplay features such as ending an advantageous state with a specific game during a special state, and then transitioning back to an advantageous state during the special state. This can be of great help in increasing interest in the game.

The specific game includes at least a first specific game and a second specific game as a plurality of games;
The gaming machine described in feature E10, wherein the second specific operation and the third specific operation are set as operations performed in the first specific game and the second specific game.

According to the above configuration, the operations performed across multiple plays during the special state are set as the second specific operation and the third specific operation. In this way, it is possible to prolong the play that attracts attention, and to appropriately increase the level of attention to the game, compared to a configuration in which a single operation determines whether or not the advantageous state ends.

Note that examples of games that are played across multiple games include the number of times a specific result is won in multiple games, or the total number of bonuses awarded based on operations in multiple games.

The invention described in the above features E1 to E11 was made with a problem to be solved by the invention, which is based on the background technology that "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a predetermined lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, in a slot machine, when a start lever is operated with medals as a gaming medium betted, an internal lottery is held and the reels start to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the result of the reels stopping corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus according to the result is awarded (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The problem is that "In the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

It is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of features A1 to A21, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F7, features G1 to G10, and features H1 to H12 individually to each of the configurations of features E1 to E11 above, or it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature Group F>
Feature F1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, a first result is a possible winner, while when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second result is a possible winner that may provide a different benefit from the first result being a winner, or a result (push order bell) in which neither result is a winner is set;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the mode result, a mode notification means (a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification by the main control device 101, a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification performance by the display control device 81) capable of executing a mode notification including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means,
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the status notification by the status notification means is executable, and a normal state (normal section) in which the status notification by the status notification means is not executable are set,
A favorable transition means for transitioning from the normal state to the favorable state based on a predetermined favorable transition condition (a function for executing a process for transitioning to the favorable zone in the first zone display process by the main control device 101);
A favorable end means for transitioning from the favorable state to the normal state based on a predetermined favorable end condition (a function for executing a process for ending the favorable zone in the second process for displaying the zone by the main control device 101);
Equipped with
A special result (first BB, second BB) that enables a transition to a special state advantageous to a player is set as a lottery result by the lottery means,
A special transition means (a function of executing a bonus state process by the main control device 101) for transitioning to the special state when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and a special pattern combination corresponding to the special result stops at the effective position;
A reserve means for reserving information corresponding to the fact that the special result has been won when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the special result and the special pattern combination has not stopped at the valid position (a function for allowing the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag by the main control device 101 to be carried over);
A special information update means (a function of performing update processing of the RT counter, the BB payout counter, etc. by the main control device 101) for updating predetermined special information (BB payout counter, RT counter, etc.) according to the progress of the special game including at least any game from the winning game in which the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result to the end game in which the special state ends;
A specific processing execution means (a function of executing a process for the end of the advantageous zone by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific processing related to the state notification using at least the special information when a predetermined execution condition is established;
A number of times grasping means (a function of executing a process of setting a specific flag by the main control device 101) for grasping corresponding information corresponding to the number of times the special result was won in one of the advantageous states or the number of times the special state was entered;
A specific means for changing the special information updated by the special information update means according to the corresponding information grasped by the number grasp means (a function for executing a process for changing the BB payout counter, etc., which is updated based on a specific flag by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result of the game started based on the operation of the start operation means is a pattern result, if the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first result will be won, and if it is operated in the second operation mode, the second result will be won or neither result will be won. Since a pattern notification including the first operation mode or the second operation mode may be executed, it is possible to realize a gameplay that greatly differs in the player's profit depending on whether or not the pattern notification is executed.

In addition, a special result is set as the result of the lottery by the lottery means, which allows for a transition to a special state as a so-called bonus that is reserved if no winning is achieved in that game, and specific processing related to status notification may be executed using special information that changes according to the progress of the special game, including any game from when the special result is won until the special state ends, so that the progress of the bonus can be associated with an advantageous state.

Furthermore, because the special information updated varies depending on the number of times a special result was won during one advantageous state or the number of times a special state was entered, for example, it is possible to use special information based on a specified number of special result wins in a specific process, while not using special information based on a number of special result wins other than the specified number in the specific process, or to vary the contribution rate (degree of influence) of special information to a specific process depending on the number of times a special state was entered. This can be done with a common processing configuration, without the need to vary the processing configuration on the specific process depending on the number of times a special result was won or the number of times a special state was entered. This makes it possible to simplify the processing while varying the results of the specific process depending on the number of times a special result was won, etc., and through this, to increase the interest in the game.

Feature F2. The specification means is configured such that, when the corresponding information grasped by the number of times grasping means is specific corresponding information corresponding to the number of times the special result was won or the number of times the special state was transitioned to a specific number of times (1 time), the special information updated by the special information update means is a predetermined first special information (e.g., a BB payout counter), while when the corresponding information grasped by the number of times grasping means is information different from the specific corresponding information, the special information updated by the special information update means is a predetermined second special information (e.g., a specific BB payout counter);
The gaming machine described in feature F1 is characterized in that the specific processing execution means is configured to execute the specific processing using the first special information as the special information regardless of the corresponding information grasped by the number of times grasping means.

According to the above configuration, the specific process execution means is configured to execute the specific process using the first special information that is updated when the number of times the special result is won or the number of times the special state is transitioned to is a specific number, regardless of the number of times these are won. Therefore, the update status of the special information only affects the specific process when the number of times is the specific number, and when the number of times is other than the specific number, the unupdated first special information is used even if special information is used, so the update status does not affect the specific process. In this way, the specific process is simplified and the process is common in any situation, but the processing result can be made different depending on the number of times the special result is won, etc.

Feature F3. As the special information, predetermined trigger special information (BB game counter, specific BB game counter) and processing special information (BB payout counter, specific BB payout counter) different from the trigger special information are set,
the specific process execution means is configured to execute the specific process using the processing special information when the trigger special information is updated to predetermined execution corresponding information (BB game counter=1) by the special information update means;
The specifying means is configured to set the trigger special information updated by the special information update means to a predetermined first trigger special information (BB game counter) when the corresponding information grasped by the number of times grasping means is specific corresponding information corresponding to the number of times the special result was won or the number of times the special state was entered being a specific number of times (one time), and to set the trigger special information updated by the special information update means to a predetermined second trigger special information (specific BB game counter) when the corresponding information grasped by the number of times grasping means is information different from the specific corresponding information,
A gaming machine described in feature F1 or feature F2, characterized in that the specific processing execution means is configured to execute the specific processing using the first trigger special information as the trigger special information regardless of the corresponding information grasped by the number grasper.

According to the above configuration, the special trigger information for determining the timing to execute the specific process differs depending on the number of times the special result is won, etc., and if it is a special state in which the first trigger special information is updated, the specific process is executed. However, if it is a special state in which the second trigger special information is updated rather than the first trigger special information, the specific process is not executed because it is not the timing to execute the specific process in the first place. In this way, it is possible to avoid executing unnecessary specific processes without complicating the processing configuration of the specific process.

Feature F4. A gaming machine according to any one of Features F1 to F3, characterized in that it is provided with an initialization means for updating the special information to initial information when the special state ends.

According to the above configuration, the special information is initialized to the initial information each time the special state ends. In this way, even if the processing configuration is such that the special information in the special state a specified number of times is used for the specific processing, after the special state ends a specified number of times, the special information for the specified number of times is initialized to the initial information, and the specific processing thereafter is performed using the initialized special information. Therefore, it is possible to have only the update status in the special state for the specified number of times contribute to the specific processing.

Feature F5. When a predetermined special end condition is satisfied in the special state, a special end means (a function of executing a process for BB end in the bonus state process by the main control device 101) is provided to end the special state;
A gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F4, characterized in that the special end condition is met when the special information update means updates a specified piece of special information to end special information.

The above configuration does not provide special information specifically for specific processing, but uses information for determining the end of a special state as special information for specific processing. This makes it possible to effectively use existing configurations to associate specific processing related to status notification in advantageous states with information on game progress during special states.

Feature F6: The specific process execution means
The specific process is configured to execute a process of ending the advantageous state in response to the special information,
A gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F5, characterized in that if the special information updated by the special information update means is special information for ending the advantageous state, a process for ending the advantageous state is executed, and if the updated special information is special information different from the special information for ending the advantageous state, a process for ending the advantageous state is not executed.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which it is possible to end an advantageous state using special information updated in a special state, etc., a configuration in which the advantageous state ends or does not end depending on the number of times a special result is won or the number of times a special state is entered can be realized with a simple configuration in which the type of special information updated is different.

Feature F7. When the advantageous state is ended by the advantageous ending means, an advantageous initialization means (a function of executing an initialization process of advantageous zone information by the main control device 101) is provided that executes an initialization process of information updated in the advantageous state;
A gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F6, characterized in that the corresponding information grasped by the number grasping means is included in the information used for the initialization processing by the advantageous initialization means.

According to the above configuration, each time an advantageous state ends, the corresponding information corresponding to the number of times a special result has been won and the number of times a special state has been transitioned to is initialized. In this way, the number of times the special result has been won and the number of times a transition has been made can be managed as the number of times in one advantageous state, making it possible to prevent the degree of advantage, etc. from being carried over across advantageous states.

The invention described in the above features F1 to F7 was made with a problem to be solved by the invention, which is based on the background technology that "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a predetermined lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, in a slot machine, when a start lever is operated with medals as a gaming medium betted, an internal lottery is held and the reels start to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the reels stop corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus corresponding to the result is awarded (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The problem is that "In the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

The technical ideas shown in any one of the features A1 to A21, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D10, E1 to E11, F1 to F7, G1 to G10, and H1 to H12 can be applied individually to each of the features F1 to F7 above, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature Group G>
Feature G1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, a first result is a possible winner, while when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second result is a possible winner that may provide a different benefit from the first result being a winner, or a result (push order bell) in which neither result is a winner is set;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the mode result, a mode notification means (a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification by the main control device 101, a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification performance by the display control device 81) capable of executing a mode notification including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means,
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the status notification by the status notification means is executable, and a normal state (normal section) in which the status notification by the status notification means is not executable are set,
A favorable transition means for transitioning from the normal state to the favorable state based on a predetermined favorable transition condition (a function for executing a process for transitioning to the favorable zone in the first process for displaying the zone by the main control device 101);
A favorable end means for transitioning from the favorable state to the normal state based on a predetermined favorable end condition (a function for executing a process for ending the favorable zone in the second process for displaying the zone by the main control device 101);
Equipped with
A special result (first BB, second BB) that enables a transition to a special state advantageous to a player is set as a lottery result by the lottery means,
A special transition means (a function of executing a bonus state process by the main control device 101) for transitioning to the special state when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and a special pattern combination corresponding to the special result stops at the effective position;
A reserve means for reserving information corresponding to the fact that the special result has been won when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the special result and the special pattern combination has not stopped at the valid position (a function for allowing the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag by the main control device 101 to be carried over);
A special termination means (a function of executing a process for terminating the BB state in the bonus state process by the main control device 101) for terminating the special state when a predetermined special termination condition is established in the special state;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the advantageous end condition is established in the special state, the advantageous transition condition is established before the special state ends.

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result of the game started based on the operation of the start operation means is a pattern result, if the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first result will be won, and if it is operated in the second operation mode, the second result will be won or neither result will be won. Since a pattern notification including the first operation mode or the second operation mode may be executed, it is possible to realize a gameplay that greatly differs in the player's profit depending on whether or not the pattern notification is executed.

Furthermore, as a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a special result is set that allows a transition to a special state as a so-called bonus that is reserved if no prize is won in that game, and it is set so that if the condition for ending the advantageous state is met during that special state, the condition for transitioning to the advantageous state is met during that special state. In other words, when an advantageous state ends during a special state, a transition to the advantageous state occurs again during that special state, and it is possible to connect one advantageous state to the next advantageous state via the special state. This makes it possible to use the special state to associate multiple advantageous states, which can help increase the interest of the game.

Feature G2. The first special information update means (a function of executing an update process of the BB game counter and the BB minor role counter by the main control device 101) is provided for updating the predetermined first special information (BB game counter, BB minor role counter) according to the game progress in the special state;
The advantageous end condition is established when the first special information is updated to a predetermined end information (BB game counter = 1, BB minor win counter = 1),
A gaming machine described in feature G1, characterized in that the special end condition is met after the first special information is updated to the end information.

According to the above configuration, the advantageous state is ended using the first special information that is updated according to the progress of the game in the special state. This makes it possible to effectively associate the special state with the advantageous state. Furthermore, the advantageous state ends when the first special information is updated to the end information, while the special state ends after the first special information is updated to the end information, so there is room for a re-transition to the advantageous state after the advantageous state ends during the special state. With this configuration, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the advantageous state ends during a special state while effectively associating the special state with the advantageous state, and then a re-transition to the advantageous state during the special state occurs.

Feature G3. A second special information update means (a function for executing an update process of the BB payout counter by the main control device 101) for updating second special information (BB payout counter) different from the first special information according to the progress of the game in the special state;
A specific processing execution means (a function of executing a processing at the time of transition to an advantageous zone by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific processing related to the status notification using the second special information when a transition from the normal state to the advantageous state occurs due to the advantageous transition means;
A gaming machine as described in feature G2, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to the above configuration, when an advantageous state is ended using first special information that is updated according to game progress during a special state, and then a transition to an advantageous state is made again, specific processing related to notification of the state at the time of transition to the advantageous state is performed using second special information that is updated during the special state and is different from the first special information. In other words, the information when an advantageous state is ended during a special state and the information when a transition to an advantageous state is made during a special state are both information that is updated according to game progress during the special state, and are separate pieces of information. In this way, it is possible to make the association between the special state and the advantageous state stronger, while making the information used for specific processing more likely to change according to game progress during the special state.

More specifically, for example, if the same information is used for both the end of the advantageous state and the specific processing at the time of transition, and there is little change in game progress from the end of the advantageous state to the re-transition, the information used for the end of the advantageous state and the specific processing is likely to be similar, regardless of game progress during the special state. In that regard, by using separate information as described above, it is expected that the timing of the end of the advantageous state will change, and the second special information used for the re-transition to the advantageous state will change, depending on game progress during the special state. This will diversify the game, and attract great interest in game progress during the special state.

Feature G4: When the game progress until the first special information is updated to the end information in the special state is the first game progress, the second special information is updated to the first information (BB payout counter = 7, etc.),
In the special state, when the game progress until the first special information is updated to the end information is a second game progress different from the first game progress, the second special information is updated to second information (BB payout counter = 1, etc.) different from the first information,
A gaming machine described in feature G3, characterized in that when the specific process is performed by the specific process execution means using the first information, the result of the specific process is more likely to be advantageous to the player than when the specific process is performed using the second information.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature G3. In this way, the second special information is configured to be updated to the first information or the second information depending on the progress of the game until the first special information is updated to the end information, and the result of the specific process is more advantageous to the player when the specific process is performed using the first information than when the specific process is performed using the second information. This makes the player want to progress in the game so that the first special information is updated to the first information during the game until it is updated to the end information, making it possible to increase interest during the special state.

Feature G5. A gaming machine as described in Feature G3 or Feature G4, characterized in that the special states are set to a first special state (first BB state) in which the number of plays required until the first special information becomes the end information is a first number of plays, and a second special state (second BB state) in which the number of plays required until the first special information becomes the end information is a second number of plays different from the first number of plays.

According to the above configuration, the number of plays required from transitioning to a special state until the advantageous state ends differs depending on the type of special state. In this way, the specific processing performed when re-transitioning to an advantageous state is more likely to use different second special information. Therefore, the results of the specific processing are more likely to differ depending on which special state is transitioned to, making it possible to attract a high level of interest in the special state to which it is transitioned and the special result that is won.

Feature G6. The gaming machine described in Feature G5, characterized in that when the first special information is updated to the end information in the first special state, the second special information may be updated to third information (e.g., BB payout counter = 14), and when the first special information is updated to the end information in the second special state, the second special information may be updated to the third information.

According to the above configuration, the second special information provided to the specific process may be the same third information regardless of the special state. In this way, for example, the specific process does not need to have a processing configuration dedicated to each special state, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

Feature G7. The gaming machine described in Feature G6, characterized in that the type of the second special information that is updated when the first special information is updated to the end information in the first special state is included in the type of the second special information that is updated when the first special information is updated to the end information in the second special state, or the type of the second special information that is updated when the first special information is updated to the end information in the second special state is included in the type of the second special information that is updated when the first special information is updated to the end information in the first special state.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature G6. In this way, by setting the processing configuration of the specific processing for the special state with more patterns (types) of the second special information, it is possible to directly use the specific processing for the special state with more patterns in the special state with fewer patterns.

Feature G8. A gaming machine as described in Feature G6 or Feature G7, characterized in that the probability that the second special information is updated to the third information when the first special information is updated to the end information in the first special state is different from the probability that the second special information is updated to the third information when the first special information is updated to the end information in the second special state.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the second special information updated to the third information is used in the specific process regardless of the special state, the probability that the second special information updated to the third information is used varies depending on each special state. Therefore, for example, even if the result of the specific process using the third information is not made different depending on the special state, it is possible to make the result of the specific process more likely to differ depending on the special state when viewed overall. Also, even if the result of the specific process using the third information differs depending on the special state, the probability of the third information becoming the third information in each special state is also different, so the difference between each special state becomes more noticeable. In this way, by making the probability of the third information becoming the third information different depending on the special state, it is possible to successfully characterize each special state and attract interest in which special state to transition to.

Feature G9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features G6 to G8, characterized in that the specific process by the specific process execution means is set to produce the same processing result when the third information is used in the first special state and when the third information is used in the second special state.

According to the above configuration, even if the result of the specific process using the third information is not made different depending on the special state, it is possible to make the result of the specific process more likely to differ depending on the special state when viewed overall. Therefore, by making the probability of the third information being obtained different depending on the special state, it is possible to effectively characterize each special state, and to draw attention to which special state will be transitioned to.

Feature G10. A gaming machine according to any one of Features G6 to G8, characterized in that the specific process performed by the specific process execution means is set to result in different processing results when the third information is used in the first special state and when the third information is used in the second special state.

According to the above configuration, the probability of the third information becoming the third information differs in each special state, so the difference between the special states becomes more noticeable. Therefore, by varying the probability of the third information becoming the third information depending on the special state, it becomes possible to effectively characterize each special state, and interest can be drawn as to which special state the transition will occur.

The invention described in the above features G1 to G10 was made with a problem to be solved by the invention, which is based on the background technology that "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a predetermined lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, in a slot machine, when a start lever is operated with medals as a gaming medium betted, an internal lottery is held and the reels start to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the reels stop corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus corresponding to the result is awarded (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The background technology is "Here, in the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

It is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of features A1 to A21, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F7, features G1 to G10, and features H1 to H12 individually to each of the configurations of features G1 to G10 above, or it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature H Group>
Feature H1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, a first result is a possible winner, while when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second result is a possible winner that may provide a different benefit from the first result being a winner, or a result (push order bell) in which neither result is a winner is set;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the mode result, a mode notification means (a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification by the main control device 101, a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification performance by the display control device 81) capable of executing a mode notification including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means,
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the status notification by the status notification means is executable, and a normal state (normal section) in which the status notification by the status notification means is not executable are set,
A favorable transition means for transitioning from the normal state to the favorable state based on a predetermined favorable transition condition (a function for executing a process for transitioning to the favorable zone in the first zone display process by the main control device 101);
A favorable end means for transitioning from the favorable state to the normal state based on a predetermined favorable end condition (a function for executing a process for ending the favorable zone in the second process for displaying the zone by the main control device 101);
Equipped with
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (AT mode) in which the mode notification means is more likely to execute the mode notification, and a second advantageous state (normal mode, CZ mode) in which the mode notification means is less likely to execute the mode notification than the first advantageous state are set,
A first advantageous transition determination means (a function of executing a process for AT lottery by the main control device 101) for executing a first advantageous transition determination for transitioning to the first advantageous state in the second advantageous state;
a first advantageous transition means for transitioning from the second advantageous state to the first advantageous state when the result of the first advantageous transition judgment by the first advantageous transition judgment means corresponds to transitioning to the first advantageous state (a function for executing a process for transitioning to an advantageous zone in a first process for zone display by the main control device 101);
a specific first advantageous transition means (a function of executing a process to cause a transition to the AT mode based on the main control device 101 reaching a ceiling game number) for transitioning to the first advantageous state regardless of the result of the first advantageous transition judgment by the first advantageous transition judgment means or without making the first advantageous transition judgment by the first advantageous transition judgment means when the number of games played in the second advantageous state reaches a predetermined specific number;
A specific number setting means (a function of executing a process of setting a ceiling game number by the main control device 101) for setting the specific number when a transition from the normal state to the advantageous state occurs by the advantageous transition means;
Equipped with
As a result of the selection by the pre-selection means, a special result (first BB, second BB) is set which enables a transition from a normal game state (normal game state, carryover state) to a special state advantageous to the player;
A special transition means (a function of executing a bonus state process by the main control device 101) for transitioning from the normal gaming state to the special state when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the special result and a special pattern combination corresponding to the special result stops at the effective position;
A reserve means for reserving information corresponding to the fact that the special result has been won when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the special result and the special pattern combination has not stopped at the valid position (a function for allowing the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag by the main control device 101 to be carried over);
Equipped with
The specific number setting means is characterized in that it is easier to set a smaller number of games as the specific number when setting the specific number in the special state than when setting the specific number in the normal game state.

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result of the game started based on the operation of the start operation means is a pattern result, if the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first result will be won, and if it is operated in the second operation mode, the second result will be won or neither result will be won. Since a pattern notification including the first operation mode or the second operation mode may be executed, it is possible to realize a gameplay that greatly differs in the player's profit depending on whether or not the pattern notification is executed.

The mode notification is executed in an advantageous state, and it is set so that mode notification is more likely to be performed in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state. In the second advantageous state, a first advantageous transition determination to the first advantageous state is performed, and a specific number is also set as the ceiling number of games to the first advantageous state. Therefore, even if the first advantageous transition determination is not won, a transition to the first advantageous state will occur if at least a specific number of plays are played in the second advantageous state, and this is a design that stimulates the desire to play in the second advantageous state.

Furthermore, as a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a special result is set that allows a transition to a special state as a so-called bonus that is reserved if no winning is achieved in that game, and if a transition to an advantageous state occurs during that special state, the specific number as the ceiling game number is set to be lower than when a transition to an advantageous state occurs during a normal game state, so that it is advantageous for the player if a transition to an advantageous state occurs during a special state. In this way, it is possible to add new benefits to the transition to the bonus state, and it is possible to appropriately increase the sense of anticipation for transitioning to a special state as a bonus state or winning a special result.

Feature H2. A gaming machine according to Feature H1, characterized in that the advantageous ending condition is met when the transition to the special state occurs.

According to the above configuration, when a special result is won and a special pattern combination is stopped in an effective position, a transition to a special state occurs and the advantageous state ends. This makes it easier to play the special state as if it were the normal state, and it is possible to ideally realize the playability of feature H1, in that the ceiling number of games is shortened when a transition to an advantageous state occurs during a special state.

Feature H3. The gaming machine described in Feature H2 is characterized by being equipped with a limiting means capable of limiting the establishment of the advantageous end condition (a function for executing a process to set a specific flag by the main control device 101, and a function for executing a process to prevent the advantageous period from ending if seven coins are not paid out in the first BB game).

According to the above configuration, in feature H2, the end of the advantageous state may be restricted, so that, for example, it is possible to prevent repeated attempts to shorten the ceiling game number. In this way, it is possible to ensure the game balance of a game in which a short ceiling game number is set when transitioning to an advantageous state during a special state.

Feature H4. The gaming machine described in Feature H3, wherein the restriction means restricts the advantageous end condition from being established when a transition to the special state occurs.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature H3.

Feature H5. A gaming machine according to Feature H3 or Feature H4, characterized in that in a predetermined specific game in the special state, when a first game result (7 coins paid out) occurs, the favorable end condition is met or is more likely to be met, whereas in a specific game, when a second game result (such as 1 coin paid out) different from the first game result occurs, the favorable end condition is not met or is more difficult to be met than in the case of the first game result.

According to the above configuration, a transition to a special state does not necessarily mean that the advantageous state ends. The advantageous state ends when the game result of a specific game during the special state becomes the first game result, and the advantageous state does not end when the game result becomes the second game result. In this way, it becomes more difficult to transition to an advantageous state during a special state and get a chance to set a short ceiling game number, which prevents the player from becoming too advantageous and makes it possible to appropriately increase attention to the specific game during the special state.

Feature H6. The gaming machine described in Feature H5, wherein the limiting means limits the specific game so that the favorable end condition is not met even if the first game result is achieved.

The above configuration clarifies that even if the first game result is achieved in a specific game during a special state, the limiting means may prevent the advantageous state from ending. In this way, it is possible to increase attention to the specific game while limiting the chances of resetting the ceiling number of games, thereby improving the health of the game.

Feature H7: A storage means (a function of executing a process of setting a specific flag by the main control device 101) is provided for storing predetermined special information (specific flag) when a transition to the advantageous state occurs in the special state;
The gaming machine described in any one of features H3 to H6, characterized in that the restriction means restricts the establishment of the advantageous ending condition in the special state entered when the special information is stored.

According to the above configuration, when a transition to an advantageous state occurs during a special state, creating a chance of a short ceiling game number, special information is stored. As a result, the advantageous period will not end during the special state thereafter, and as a result, the chance of a short ceiling game number will not be received. In this way, it is possible to appropriately limit the chance of a short ceiling game number.

Feature H8. A memory lottery means (a function of executing a specific flag set lottery by the main control device 101) is provided for executing a memory lottery for storing the special information when a transition to the advantageous state occurs in the special state,
The gaming machine described in feature H7, wherein the memory means is configured to store the special information when the result of the memory lottery by the memory lottery means is a result corresponding to storing the special information.

According to the above configuration, even if a transition to an advantageous state occurs during a special state, the special information is not necessarily stored. Instead, the special information is stored according to the results of a memory lottery, and the chances of resetting the ceiling number of games thereafter are limited. In this way, it is possible to improve the playability of the game in which the ceiling number of games is reset.

Feature H9. The gaming machine described in Feature H8, wherein the memory lottery means is set so that the result of the memory lottery is more likely to be a result corresponding to storing the special information when the specific number set by the specific number setting means is a second specific number that is greater than the first specific number than when the specific number is a first specific number.

According to the above configuration, when a long ceiling game number is set, special information is less likely to be stored than when a short ceiling game number is set. Here, if a transition to the special state occurs when the ceiling game number is close and the ceiling game number is reset, there is a high possibility that the play up to that point will be wasted, and it is more beneficial for the player to cause a transition to the special state in a situation where the ceiling game number has not yet been reached. In this regard, by using the above configuration, it is possible to play in such a way that a transition to the special state occurs again when a long ceiling game number is predicted to be set, taking into consideration the risk that the ceiling game number will be reset even though a short ceiling game number is set, and the ceiling game number is close, and thus the interest of the game is increased.

Feature H10. When a predetermined special end condition is established in the special state, a special end means (a function of executing a process for ending the BB state in the bonus state process by the main control device 101) is provided to transition from the special state to the normal gaming state;
As the special state, a first special state (first BB state) in which a predetermined first special end condition is set as the special end condition, and a second special state (second BB state) in which a second special end condition different from the first special end condition is set as the special end condition are set,
A gaming machine described in any one of features H1 to H9, wherein when a transition to the advantageous state occurs in the special state, the advantageous state is unlikely to end until the special state ends.

According to the above configuration, once the ceiling number of games is set by transitioning to an advantageous state during a special state, the advantageous state will continue at least until the special state is ended, so in order to reset the ceiling number of games, it will be necessary to end the special state and then transition to the special state again. In this case, since multiple special states with different termination conditions are set in the above configuration, the number of games played until the next chance to reset the ceiling number of games is likely to differ depending on which special state is transitioned to. In this way, the ceiling number of games can be reset at a rate that can be adjusted simply by increasing the number of special states as bonus states, making it possible to diversify the play of feature H1 with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature H11. A gaming machine according to any one of Features H1 to H10, characterized in that the specific number setting means is more likely to set a smaller number of plays as the specific number when the game result of the special game before the transition to the advantageous state occurs in the special state is a first game result (payout of 7 coins), than when the game result of the special game is a second game result (payout of 1 coin, etc.) different from the first game result.

According to the above configuration, not only is it necessary to transition to an advantageous state during a special state, but the game result of the special game before the transition to the advantageous state becomes the first game result, which makes it easier to set a lower ceiling game number than if it were the second game result. In this way, it is possible to significantly improve playability during the special state.

Feature H12. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, a first result is a possible winner, while when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second result is a possible winner that may provide a different benefit from the first result being a winner, or a result (push order bell) in which neither result is a winner is set;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the mode result, a mode notification means (a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification by the main control device 101, a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification performance by the display control device 81) capable of executing a mode notification including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means,
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the status notification by the status notification means is executable, and a normal state (normal section) in which the status notification by the status notification means is not executable are set,
A favorable transition means for transitioning from the normal state to the favorable state based on a predetermined favorable transition condition (a function for executing a process for transitioning to the favorable zone in the first zone display process by the main control device 101);
A favorable end means for transitioning from the favorable state to the normal state based on a predetermined favorable end condition (a function for executing a process for ending the favorable zone in the second process for displaying the zone by the main control device 101);
Equipped with
A specific process execution means (a function of executing a process for setting a ceiling game number by the main control device 101) for executing a specific process related to the status notification when a transition from the normal state to the advantageous state occurs by the advantageous transition means;
Equipped with
As a result of the selection by the pre-selection means, a special result (first BB, second BB) is set which enables a transition from a normal game state (normal game state, carryover state) to a special state advantageous to the player;
A special transition means (a function of executing a bonus state process by the main control device 101) for transitioning from the normal gaming state to the special state when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the special result and a special pattern combination corresponding to the special result stops at the effective position;
A reserve means for reserving information corresponding to the fact that the special result has been won when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the special result and the special pattern combination has not stopped at the valid position (a function for allowing the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag by the main control device 101 to be carried over);
Equipped with
The specific process execution means is characterized in that when the specific process is executed in the special state, it is easier to execute the specific process so as to result in a favorable result for the player than when the specific process is executed in the normal gaming state.

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result of the game started based on the operation of the start operation means is a pattern result, if the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first result will be won, and if it is operated in the second operation mode, the second result will be won or neither result will be won. Since a pattern notification including the first operation mode or the second operation mode may be executed, it is possible to realize a gameplay that greatly differs in the player's profit depending on whether or not the pattern notification is executed.

The status notification can be executed during an advantageous state but cannot be executed in a normal state. A special result is set as the result of the lottery by the lottery means, which allows a transition to a special state as a so-called bonus that is reserved if no prize is won in that game, and when a transition to the advantageous state occurs during that special state, the result of the specific process related to the status notification executed at the time of the transition to the advantageous state is set to be more advantageous to the player than when the transition to the advantageous state occurs during a normal game state. This makes it more advantageous for the player if a transition to the advantageous state occurs during a special state, and makes it possible to add a new benefit to the transition to the bonus state. This can suitably increase the expectation of transitioning to a special state as a bonus state and winning a special result.

Note that, for the above feature H12, the configurations defined by features H1 to H11 may be applied individually or in combination, and some of the configurations defined by features H1 to H11 may be applied individually or in combination.

The invention described in the above features H1 to H12 was made with a problem to be solved by the invention, which is based on the background technology that "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a predetermined lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, in a slot machine, when a start lever is operated with medals as a gaming medium betted, an internal lottery is held and the reels start to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the reels stop corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus corresponding to the result is awarded (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The problem is that "In the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

The technical ideas shown in any one of the features A1 to A21, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D10, E1 to E11, F1 to F7, G1 to G10, and H1 to H12 may be applied individually to each of the features H1 to H12 above, or some or all of the technical ideas may be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

In addition, to each of the configurations of Feature Group A to Feature Group H described above, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configurations of other Feature Groups A to H individually, or to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-mentioned features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: A game machine that has an operating means operated by the player, a game ball launching means that launches game balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched game balls to a specified game area, and various game components arranged within the game area, and that awards a special prize to the player when the game ball passes through a specified passage section of each of the game components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a series of symbols consisting of multiple symbols in a variable manner and then displays the series of symbols in a final stopped state, in which the variation of the symbols is started by operating a start operating means, the variation of the symbols is stopped by operating a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol.

Ball-operated belt-type gaming machine: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable pattern sequence consisting of multiple patterns and then displays the final stop of the pattern sequence, in which the pattern variation is started due to the operation of a start operation means, the pattern variation is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stop pattern at the time of the stop is a specific pattern, and further equipped with a ball receiving tray and an insertion device that performs an insertion process to take in game balls from the ball receiving tray, and a payout device that pays out game balls to the ball receiving tray, and configured so that the operation of the start operation means is valid when game balls are inserted by the insertion device.

10... slot machine as a gaming machine, 32... reels as a rotating body, 41... start lever as a start operation means, 42-44... stop switches as a stop operation means, 64... speaker constituting the auxiliary performance section, 65... auxiliary display section constituting the auxiliary performance section, 68... indication monitor, N8... eighth display segment as a section indicator, 81... display control device as a sub-control board, 101... main control device as a main control board, 102... CPU constituting various control means such as lottery means and main control means.

Claims (1)

A plurality of rotating bodies having a plurality of patterns applied thereto in a circumferential direction;
A display unit that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated;
a lottery means for holding a lottery to determine whether or not to award a special benefit to a player based on an operation of the start operation means;
A stop operation means for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a drive control means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
a first result which allows a prize to be won when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, and a second result which allows a prize to be won when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, as a lottery result by the lottery means;
a mode notifying means capable of executing a mode notifying including the first operation mode and the second operation mode by a predetermined notifying means;
a specific state is set in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is executable,
A means for transitioning to the specific state based on a predetermined transition condition;
A means for terminating the specific state based on a predetermined termination condition;
a means for executing a transition determination that enables the transition condition to be established based on a lottery result by the lottery means;
Equipped with
The transition determination is set so that the number of cases where it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied is greater than the number of cases where it is determined that the transition condition is not satisfied,
a case where the lottery result by the lottery means corresponds to the establishment of the transition condition is set more frequently than a case where the lottery result by the lottery means does not correspond to the establishment of the transition condition,
A gaming machine comprising a means for executing a predetermined process related to the status notification in a game following a game in which the transition condition is satisfied .

Images